WO2020196804A1 - User equipments, base stations, and methods - Google Patents

User equipments, base stations, and methods Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020196804A1
WO2020196804A1 PCT/JP2020/013878 JP2020013878W WO2020196804A1 WO 2020196804 A1 WO2020196804 A1 WO 2020196804A1 JP 2020013878 W JP2020013878 W JP 2020013878W WO 2020196804 A1 WO2020196804 A1 WO 2020196804A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
pdcch
slot
pdsch
gnb
dci format
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2020/013878
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Toshizo Nogami
Shoichi Suzuki
Tomoki Yoshimura
Huifa LIN
Daiichiro Nakashima
Wataru Ouchi
Taewoo Lee
Original Assignee
Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha
FG Innovation Company Limited
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha, FG Innovation Company Limited filed Critical Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha
Priority to US17/441,056 priority Critical patent/US12063178B2/en
Priority to SG11202110428QA priority patent/SG11202110428QA/en
Priority to CN202080023240.7A priority patent/CN113615244A/en
Priority to EP20777059.5A priority patent/EP3949499A4/en
Publication of WO2020196804A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020196804A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0091Signaling for the administration of the divided path
    • H04L5/0094Indication of how sub-channels of the path are allocated
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0003Two-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0005Time-frequency
    • H04L5/0007Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A), DMT
    • H04L5/001Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A), DMT the frequencies being arranged in component carriers

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates generally to communication systems. More specifically, the present disclosure relates to new signaling, procedures, user equipments (UEs), base stations and methods.
  • the present application claims priority from Japanese Application JP201 9-060240, filed on March 27, 2019. The content of the Japanese Application is hereby incorporated by reference into this application. Background
  • a wireless communication system may provide communication for a number of wireless communication devices, each of which may be serviced by a base station.
  • a base station may be a device that communicates with wireless communication devices.
  • wireless communication devices may communicate with one or more devices using a communication structure.
  • the communication structure used may only offer limited flexibility and/or efficiency.
  • systems and methods that improve communication flexibility and/or efficiency may be beneficial.
  • a user equipment which communicates with a base station, includes: higher layer processing circuitry configured to acquire radio resource control (RRC) configuration information, the RRC configuration information indicating a configuration of downlink control (DCI) format 2_0; and receiving circuitry configured to monitor a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with the DCI format 2_0.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • DCI format 2_0 includes a first information field.
  • the first information field indicates a remaining channel occupancy duration.
  • the remaining channel occupancy duration is expressed as the number of OFDM symbol(s) starting from a slot where the DCI format 2_0 is detected.
  • a base station which communicates, with a user equipment (UE), includes: higher layer processing circuitry configured to send radio resource control (RRC) configuration information, the RRC configuration information indicating a configuration of downlink control (DCI) format 2_0; and transmitting circuitry configured to transmit a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with the DCI format 2_0.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • DCI format 2_0 includes a first information field.
  • the first information field indicates a remaining channel occupancy duration.
  • the remaining channel occupancy duration is expressed as the number of OFDM symbol(s) starting from a slot where the DCI format 2_0 is transmitted.
  • a method for a user equipment (UE), which communicates with a base station includes: acquiring radio resource control (RRC) configuration information, the RRC configuration information indicating a configuration of downlink control (DCI) format 2_0; and monitoring a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with the DCI format 2_0.
  • the DCI format 2_0 includes a first information field.
  • the first information field indicates a remaining channel occupancy duration.
  • the remaining channel occupancy duration is expressed as the number of OFDM symbol(s) starting from a slot where the DCI format 2_0 is detected.
  • a method for a base station which communicates with a user equipment (UE), includes: sending radio resource control (RRC) configuration information, the RRC configuration information indicating a configuration of downlink control (DCI) format 2_0; and transmitting a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with the DCI format 2_0.
  • the DCI format 2_0 includes a first information field.
  • the first information field indicates a remaining channel occupancy duration.
  • the remaining channel occupancy duration is expressed as the number of OFDM symbol(s) starting from a slot where the DCI format 2_0 is transmitted.
  • Figure 1 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of one or more gNBs and one or more user equipments (UEs) in which systems and methods for downlink and uplink transmissions may be implemented;
  • UEs user equipments
  • Figure 2 illustrates various components that may be utilized in a UE
  • Figure 3 illustrates various components that may be utilized in a gNB;
  • Figure 4 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of a UE in which systems and methods for downlink and uplink transmissions may be implemented;
  • Figure 5 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of a gNB in which systems and methods for downlink and uplink transmissions may be implemented;
  • Figure 6 is a diagram illustrating one example of a resource grid
  • Figure 7 shows examples of several numerologies
  • Figure 8 shows examples of subframe structures for the numerologies that are shown in Figure 7;
  • Figure 9 shows examples of subframe structures for the numerologies that are shown in Figure 7;
  • Figure 10 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of a gNB
  • Figure 1 1 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of a UE
  • Figure 12 illustrates an example of control resource unit and reference signal structure
  • Figure 13 illustrates an example of control channel and shared channel multiplexing
  • Figure 14 illustrates PDCCH monitoring occasions for slot-based scheduling
  • Figure 15 illustrates PDCCH monitoring occasions for non-slot-based scheduling
  • Figure 16 shows an example of Channel Access procedure
  • Figure 17 shows an example of deferment of transmission
  • Figure 18 shows an example of channel access priority class for downlink transmission(s);
  • Figure 19 shows an example of channel access priority class for uplink transmission(s);
  • Figure 20 shows an example of Channel Access procedure
  • Figure 21 shows an example of Channel Access procedure
  • Figure 22 shows an example of Channel Access procedure
  • Figure 23 shows an example of CW size adjustment
  • Figure 24 shows an example of LBT for a transmission with a directional beam
  • Figure 25 shows an example of LBT for a transmission with a directional beam
  • Figure 26 shows an example of sub-band configuration
  • Figure 27 shows an example of PDCCH monitoring occasions
  • Figure 28 shows an example of triggering signal and CORESET resource allocation
  • Figure 29 shows an example of triggering signal and CORESET resource allocation
  • Figure 30 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling
  • Figure 31 shows a dynamic SFI signaling for a wideband operation
  • Figure 32 shows a dynamic SFI signaling for a wideband operation
  • Figure 33 shows a dynamic SFI signaling for a wideband operation
  • Figure 34 shows a dynamic SFI signaling for a wideband operation
  • Figure 35 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling
  • Figure 36 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling
  • Figure 37 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling
  • Figure 38 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling
  • Figure 39 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling
  • Figure 40 shows a method for a UE which communicates with a base station
  • Figure 41 shows a method for a base station which communicates with a UE.
  • a user equipment (UE) which communicates with a base station is described.
  • the UE may comprise higher layer processing circuitry configured to acquire radio resource control (RRC) configuration information.
  • the RRC configuration information may indicate one or more entries, each of the entries specifying a slot format.
  • the UE may also comprise receiving circuitry configured to receive a physical signal and a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with a down link control (DCI) format.
  • the DCI format may include a first information field and a second information field.
  • the first information field may indicate an entry out of the entries.
  • the second information field may indicate a time domain location of a first symbol within a first slot format.
  • the first symbol may be an initial symbol on which the PDCCH is mapped.
  • the first slot format is a slot format corresponding to the indicated entry.
  • a user equipment (UE) which communicates with a base station is described.
  • the UE may comprise higher layer processing circuitry configured to acquire radio resource control (RRC) configuration information.
  • RRC configuration information may specify more than one control resource sets
  • the UE may also comprise receiving circuitry configured to receive more than one physical downlink control channels (PDCCHs) in the CORESETs and a physical downlink control channel (PDSCH) in the BWP. If the PDCCHs schedule the PDSCH, one of the PDCCH may be considered to be valid and all the other PDCCHs may be considered to be invalid.
  • PDCCHs physical downlink control channels
  • PDSCH physical downlink control channel
  • a user equipment (UE) which communicates with a base station is described.
  • the UE may comprise higher layer processing circuitry configured to acquire radio resource control (RRC) configuration information, the RRC configuration information indicating a monitoring occasion.
  • the UE may also comprise receiving circuitry configured to monitor, in a first sub-band, a first physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with a first down link control (DCI) format.
  • the first DCI format may include a first information field and a second information field.
  • the first information field may indicate a first slot format combination.
  • the second information field may indicate a second slot format combination.
  • the first slot format combination may be applied to the first sub-band.
  • the second slot format combination may be applied to a second sub-band.
  • the first sub-band and the second sub-band may be included in a same downlink bandwidth part (DL BWP).
  • DL BWP downlink bandwidth part
  • the receiving circuitry may also be configured to monitor, in a first sub-band, a second PDCCH with a second DCI format.
  • the receiving circuitry may further be configured to monitor, in a second sub-band, a third PDCCH with a third DCI format.
  • the second DCI format may include a third information field.
  • the third information field may indicate a fourth slot format combination.
  • the fourth slot format combination may be applied to the first sub-band.
  • the third DCI format may include a forth information field.
  • the fourth information field may indicate a fifth slot format combination.
  • the fifth slot format combination may be applied to the second sub-band.
  • a base station which communicates with a user equipment (UE) is described.
  • the base station may comprise higher layer processing circuitry configured to send radio resource control (RRC) configuration information, the RRC configuration information indicating a monitoring occasion.
  • the base station may also comprise transmitting circuitry configured to transmit, in a first sub-band, a first physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with a first down link control (DCI) format.
  • the first DCI format may include a first information field and a second information field.
  • the first information field may indicate a first slot format combination.
  • the second information field may indicate a second slot format combination.
  • the first slot format combination may be applied to the first sub-band.
  • the second slot format combination may be applied to a second sub-band.
  • the first sub-band and the second sub-band may be included in a same downlink bandwidth part (DL BWP).
  • DL BWP downlink bandwidth part
  • the transmitting circuitry may also be configured to transmit, in a first sub-band, a second PDCCH with a second DCI format.
  • the transmitting circuitry may further be configured to transmit, in a second sub-band, a third PDCCH with a third DCI format.
  • the second DCI format may include a third information field.
  • the third information field may indicate a fourth slot format combination.
  • the fourth slot format combination may be applied to the first sub-band.
  • the third DCI format may include a forth information field.
  • the fourth information field may indicate a fifth slot format combination.
  • the fifth slot format combination may be applied to the second sub-band.
  • a method for a user equipment (UE) which communicates with a base station may comprise acquiring radio resource control (RRC) configuration information.
  • the RRC configuration information may indicate a monitoring occasion.
  • the method may also comprise monitoring, in a first sub-band, a first physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with a first down link control (DCI) format.
  • the first DCI format may include a first information field and a second information field.
  • the first information field may indicate a first slot format combination.
  • the second information field may indicate a second slot format combination.
  • the first slot format combination may be applied to the first sub-band.
  • the second slot format combination may be applied to a second sub-band.
  • the first sub-band and the second sub-band may be included in a same downlink bandwidth part (DL BWP).
  • the method may comprise sending radio resource control (RRC) configuration information.
  • the RRC configuration information may indicate a monitoring occasion.
  • the method may also comprise transmitting, in a first sub-band, a first physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with a first down link control (DCI) format.
  • the first DCI format may include a first information field and a second information field.
  • the first information field may indicate a first slot format combination.
  • the second information field may indicate a second slot format combination.
  • the first slot format combination may be applied to the first sub-band.
  • the second slot format combination may be applied to a second sub-band.
  • the first sub-band and the second sub-band may be included in a same downlink bandwidth part (DL BWP).
  • the 3rd Generation Partnership Project also referred to as“3GPP,” is a collaboration agreement that aims to define globally applicable technical specifications and technical reports for third and fourth generation wireless communication systems.
  • the 3GPP may define specifications for next generation mobile networks, systems and devices.
  • 3GPP Long Term Evolution is the name given to a project to improve the Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) mobile phone or device standard to cope with future requirements.
  • UMTS has been modified to provide support and specification for the Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network
  • E-UTRAN E-UTRAN
  • LTE-A LTE-Advanced
  • NR New Radio
  • 5G NR The 3rd Generation NR
  • a wireless communication device may be an electronic device used to communicate voice and/or data to a base station, which in turn may communicate with a network of devices (e.g., public switched telephone network (PSTN), the Internet, etc.).
  • a wireless communication device may alternatively be referred to as a mobile station, a UE, an access terminal, a subscriber station, a mobile terminal, a remote station, a user terminal, a terminal, a subscriber unit, a mobile device, etc.
  • Examples of wireless communication devices include cellular phones, smart phones, personal digital assistants (PDAs), laptop computers, netbooks, e-readers, wireless modems, vehicles, Internet of Things (IoT) devices, etc.
  • PDAs personal digital assistants
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • a wireless communication device In 3GPP specifications, a wireless communication device is typically referred to as a UE. However, as the scope of the present disclosure should not be limited to the 3GPP standards, the terms “UE” and “wireless communication device” may be used interchangeably herein to mean the more general term “wireless communication device.” A UE may also be more generally referred to as a terminal device.
  • a base station is typically referred to as a Node B, an evolved Node B (eNB), a home enhanced or evolved Node B (HeNB), a next Generation Node B (gNB) or some other similar terminology.
  • eNB evolved Node B
  • HeNB home enhanced or evolved Node B
  • gNB next Generation Node B
  • the terms“base station,”“Node B,” “eNB,” “HeNB,” and “gNB” may be used interchangeably herein to mean the more general term “base station.”
  • the term “base station” may be used to denote an access point.
  • An access point may be an electronic device that provides access to a network (e.g., Local Area Network (LAN), the Internet, etc.) for wireless communication devices.
  • the term“communication device” may be used to denote both a wireless communication device and/or a base station.
  • An eNB and gNB may also be more generally referred to as a base station device.
  • a“cell” may be any communication channel that is specified by standardization or regulatory bodies to be used for International Mobile Telecommunications-Advanced (IMT-Advanced) and all of it or a subset of it may be adopted by 3GPP as licensed bands (e.g., frequency bands) to be used for communication between an eNB and a UE. It should also be noted that in E-UTRA and E-UTRAN overall description, as used herein, a“cell” may be defined as“combination of downlink and optionally uplink resources.” The linking between the carrier frequency of the downlink resources and the carrier frequency of the uplink resources may be indicated in the system information transmitted on the downlink resources.
  • Configured cells are those cells of which the UE is aware and is allowed by an eNB to transmit or receive information.“Configured cell(s)” may be serving cell(s). The UE may receive system information and perform the required measurements on all configured cells. “Configured cell(s)” for a radio connection may include a primary cell and/or no, one, or more secondary cell(s). “Activated cells” are those configured cells on which the UE is transmitting and receiving.
  • activated cells are those cells for which the UE monitors the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) and in the case of a downlink transmission, those cells for which the UE decodes a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH).
  • PDCH physical downlink control channel
  • “Deactivated cells” are those configured cells that the UE is not monitoring the transmission PDCCH. It should be noted that a “cell” may be described in terms of differing dimensions. For example, a“cell” may have temporal, spatial (e.g., geographical) and frequency characteristics.
  • the 5th generation communication systems dubbed NR (New Radio technologies) by 3GPP, envision the use of time/frequency/space resources to allow for services, such as eMBB (enhanced Mobile Broad-Band) transmission, URLLC (Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication) transmission, and eMTC (massive Machine Type Communication) transmission.
  • eMBB enhanced Mobile Broad-Band
  • URLLC Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication
  • eMTC massive Machine Type Communication
  • single-beam and/or multi-beam operations is considered for downlink and/or uplink transmissions.
  • Figure 1 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of one or more gNBs 160 and one or more UEs 102 in which systems and methods for downlink and uplink transmissions may be implemented.
  • the one or more UEs 102 communicate with one or more gNBs 160 using one or more physical antennas 122a-n.
  • a UE 102 transmits electromagnetic signals to the gNB 160 and receives electromagnetic signals from the gNB 160 using the one or more physical antennas 122a-n.
  • the gNB 160 communicates with the UE 102 using one or more physical antennas 180a-n.
  • the UE 102 and the gNB 160 may use one or more channels and/or one or more signals 1 19, 121 to communicate with each other.
  • the UE 102 may transmit information or data to the gNB 160 using one or more uplink channels 121.
  • uplink channels 121 include a physical shared channel (e.g., PUSCH (Physical Uplink Shared Channel)), and/or a physical control channel (e.g., PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control Channel)), etc.
  • the one or more gNBs 160 may also transmit information or data to the one or more UEs 102 using one or more downlink channels 1 19, for instance.
  • Examples of downlink channels 1 19 physical shared channel (e.g., PDSCH (Physical Downlink Shared Channel), and/or a physical control channel (PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel)), etc. Other kinds of channels and/or signals may be used.
  • PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel
  • PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • Each of the one or more UEs 102 may include one or more transceivers 1 18, one or more demodulators 1 14, one or more decoders 108, one or more encoders 150, one or more modulators 154, a data buffer 104 and a UE operations module 124.
  • one or more reception and/or transmission paths may be implemented in the UE 102.
  • only a single transceiver 1 18, decoder 108, demodulator 1 14, encoder 150 and modulator 154 are illustrated in the UE 102, though multiple parallel elements (e.g., transceivers 1 18, decoders 108, demodulators 1 14, encoders 150 and modulators 154) may be implemented.
  • the transceiver 1 18 may include one or more receivers 120 and one or more transmitters 158.
  • the one or more receivers 120 may receive signals from the gNB 160 using one or more antennas 122a ⁇ n. For example, the receiver 120 may receive and downconvert signals to produce one or more received signals 1 16.
  • the one or more received signals 1 16 may be provided to a demodulator 1 14.
  • the one or more receivers 120 may also sense the channel which would to be used for uplink transmissions.
  • the one or more transmitters 158 may transmit signals to the gNB 160 using one or more physical antennas 122a ⁇ n. For example, the one or more transmitters 158 may upconvert and transmit one or more modulated signals 156.
  • the demodulator 1 14 may demodulate the one or more received signals 1 16 to produce one or more demodulated signals 1 12.
  • the one or more demodulated signals 1 12 may be provided to the decoder 108.
  • the UE 102 may use the decoder 108 to decode signals.
  • the decoder 108 may produce decoded signals 1 10, which may include a UE-decoded signal 106 (also referred to as a first UE-decoded signal 106).
  • the first UE-decoded signal 106 may include received payload data, which may be stored in a data buffer 104.
  • Another signal included in the decoded signals 1 10 (also referred to as a second UE-decoded signal 1 10) may include overhead data and/or control data.
  • the second UE-decoded signal 1 10 may provide data that may be used by the UE operations module 124 to perform one or more operations.
  • the UE operations module 124 may enable the UE 102 to communicate with the one or more gNBs 160.
  • the UE operations module 124 may include one or more of a UE scheduling module 126.
  • the UE scheduling module 126 may also be referred to as UE-side higher layer processing module which performs higher layer processing.
  • the other units than UE scheduling module 126 in UE 102 may perform physical layer processing.
  • physical channels uplink physical channels and/or downlink physical channels
  • the physical channels may be used for transmitting information that is delivered from a higher layer.
  • PCCH Physical Control Channel
  • PCCH is used to transmit control information.
  • PCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel
  • UCI Uplink Control Information
  • the UCI may include Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ-ACK), Channel State information (CSI), and/or Scheduling Request (SR).
  • HARQ-ACK is used for indicating a positive acknowledgement (ACK) or a negative acknowledgment (NACK) for downlink data (i.e., Transport block(s) carrying Medium Access Control Control Element (MAC CE) and/or MAC Protocol Data Unit (MAC PDU) which may contain Downlink Shared Channel (DL-SCH)).
  • MAC CE Medium Access Control Control Element
  • MAC PDU MAC Protocol Data Unit
  • DL-SCH Downlink Shared Channel
  • the CSI is used for indicating state of downlink channel.
  • the SR is used for requesting resources of uplink data (i.e., Transport block(s) carrying MAC CE and/or MAC PDU which may contain Uplink Shared Channel
  • the UE 102 may be configured, for DL, to receive code block group (CBG) based transmissions where retransmissions may be scheduled to carry one or more sub-sets of all the code blocks of a transport block.
  • CBG code block group
  • the UE 102 may be configured to transmit CBG based transmissions where retransmissions may be scheduled to carry one or more sub-sets of all the code blocks of a transport block.
  • PCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • fields may be defined in the DCI format, and the fields are mapped to the information bits (i.e., DCI bits).
  • DCI format 1 A that is used for scheduling of one physical shared channel (PSCH) (e.g., PDSCH, transmission of one downlink transport block) in a cell is defined as the DCI format for the downlink.
  • PSCH physical shared channel
  • the DCI format(s) for PDSCH scheduling may include multiple information field, for example, carrier indicator field, frequency domain PDSCH resource allocation field, time domain PDSCH resource allocation field, bundling size field, MCS field, new data indicator field, redundancy version field, HARQ process number field, code block group flush indicator (CBGFI) field, code block group transmission indicator (CBGTI) field, PUCCH power control field, PUCCH resource indicator field, antenna port field, number of layer field, quasi-co-location (QCL) indication field, SRS triggering request field, and RNTI field. More than one pieces of the above information may be jointly coded, and in this instance jointly coded information may be indicated in a single information field.
  • a DCI format 0 that is used for scheduling of one PSCH (e.g., PUSCH, transmission of one uplink transport block) in a cell is defined as the DCI format for the uplink.
  • the DCI format for the uplink.
  • information associated with PSCH (a PDSCH resource, PUSCH resource) allocation, information associated with modulation and coding scheme (MCS) for PSCH, and DCI such as Transmission Power Control (TPC) command for PUSCH and/or PUCCH are included the DCI format.
  • the DCI format may include information associated with a beam index and/or an antenna port.
  • the beam index may indicate a beam used for downlink transmissions and uplink transmissions.
  • the antenna port may include DL antenna port and/or UL antenna port.
  • the DCI format(s) for PUSCH scheduling may include multiple information field, for example, carrier indicator field, frequency domain PUSCH resource allocation field, time domain PUSCH resource allocation field, MCS field, new data indicator field, redundancy version field, HARQ process number field, code block group flush indicator (CBGFI) field, code block group transmission indicator (CBGTI) field, PUSCH power control field, SRS resource indicator (SRI) field, wideband and/or subband transmit precoding matrix indicator (TPMI) field, antenna port field, scrambling identity field, number of layer field, CSI report triggering request field, CSI measurement request field, SRS triggering request field, and RNTI field. More than one pieces of the above information may be jointly coded, and in this instance jointly coded information may be indicated in a single information field.
  • carrier indicator field for example, carrier indicator field, frequency domain PUSCH resource allocation field, time domain PUSCH resource allocation field, MCS field, new data indicator field, redundancy version field, HARQ process number field, code block group flush
  • PSCH may be defined.
  • the UE 102 may receive the downlink data, on the scheduled downlink PSCH resource.
  • the uplink PSCH resource e.g., PUSCH resource
  • the UE 102 transmits the uplink data, on the scheduled uplink PSCH resource. Namely, the downlink PSCH is used to transmit the downlink data. And, the uplink PSCH is used to transmit the uplink data.
  • the downlink PSCH and the uplink PSCH are used to transmit information of higher layer (e.g., Radio Resource Control (RRC)) layer, and/or MAC layer).
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the downlink PSCH and the uplink PSCH are used to transmit RRC message (RRC signal) and/or MAC Control Element (MAC CE).
  • RRC message RRC signal
  • MAC CE MAC Control Element
  • the RRC message that is transmitted from the gNB 160 in downlink may be common to multiple UEs 102 within a cell (referred as a common RRC message).
  • the RRC message that is transmitted from the gNB 160 may be dedicated to a certain UE 102 (referred as a dedicated RRC message).
  • the RRC message and/or the MAC CE are also referred to as a higher layer signal.
  • the UE operations module 124 may provide information 148 to the one or more receivers 120 For example, the UE operations module 124 may inform the receiver(s) 120 when to receive retransmissions.
  • the UE operations module 124 may provide information 138 to the demodulator 1 14. For example, the UE operations module 124 may inform the demodulator 1 14 of a modulation pattern anticipated for transmissions from the gNB 160.
  • the UE operations module 124 may provide information 136 to the decoder 108. For example, the UE operations module 124 may inform the decoder 108 of an anticipated encoding for transmissions from the gNB 160.
  • the UE operations module 124 may provide information 142 to the encoder 150.
  • the information 142 may include data to be encoded and/or instructions for encoding.
  • the UE operations module 124 may instruct the encoder 150 to encode transmission data 146 and/or other information 142.
  • the other information 142 may include PDSCH HARQ-ACK information.
  • the encoder 150 may encode transmission data 146 and/or other information 142 provided by the UE operations module 124. For example, encoding the transmission data 146 and/or other information 142 may involve error detection and/or correction coding, mapping data to space, time and/or frequency resources for transmission, multiplexing, etc.
  • the encoder 150 may provide encoded data 152 to the modulator 154.
  • the UE operations module 124 may provide information 144 to the modulator 154.
  • the UE operations module 124 may inform the modulator 154 of a modulation type (e.g., constellation mapping) to be used for transmissions to the gNB 160.
  • the modulator 154 may modulate the encoded data 152 to provide one or more modulated signals 156 to the one or more transmitters 158.
  • the UE operations module 124 may provide information 140 to the one or more transmitters 158.
  • This information 140 may include instructions for the one or more transmitters 158.
  • the UE operations module 1 24 may instruct the one or more transmitters 158 when to transmit a signal to the gNB 160.
  • the one or more transmitters 158 may transmit during a UL subframe.
  • the one or more transmitters 158 may upconvert and transmit the modulated signal(s) 156 to one or more gNBs 160.
  • Each of the one or more gNBs 160 may include one or more transceivers 176, one or more demodulators 172, one or more decoders 166, one or more encoders 109, one or more modulators 1 13, a data buffer 162 and a gNB operations module 182.
  • one or more reception and/or transmission paths may be implemented in a gNB 160.
  • only a single transceiver 176, decoder 166, demodulator 172, encoder 109 and modulator 1 13 are illustrated in the gNB 160, though multiple parallel elements (e.g., transceivers 176, decoders 166, demodulators 172, encoders 109 and modulators 1 13) may be implemented.
  • the transceiver 176 may include one or more receivers 178 and one or more transmitters 1 17.
  • the one or more receivers 178 may receive signals from the UE 102 using one or more physical antennas 180a ⁇ n. For example, the receiver 178 may receive and downconvert signals to produce one or more received signals 174.
  • the one or more received signals 174 may be provided to a demodulator 172.
  • the one or more receivers 178 may also sense the channel which would to be used for downlink transmissions.
  • the one or more transmitters 1 17 may transmit signals to the UE 102 using one or more physical antennas 180a ⁇ n. For example, the one or more transmitters 1 17 may upconvert and transmit one or more modulated signals 1 15.
  • the demodulator 172 may demodulate the one or more received signals 1 74 to produce one or more demodulated signals 170.
  • the one or more demodulated signals 170 may be provided to the decoder 166.
  • the gNB 160 may use the decoder 166 to decode signals.
  • the decoder 166 may produce one or more decoded signals 164, 168.
  • a first eNB-decoded signal 164 may include received payload data (e.g. UL TB), which may be stored in a data buffer 162.
  • a second eNB-decoded signal 168 may include overhead data and/or control data.
  • the second eNB-decoded signal 168 may provide data (e.g., Uplink control information such as HARQ-ACK feedback information for PDSCH) that may be used by the gNB operations module 182 to perform one or more operations.
  • the gNB operations module 182 may enable the gNB 160 to communicate with the one or more UEs 102.
  • the gNB operations module 182 may include one or more of a gNB scheduling module 194.
  • the gNB scheduling module 194 may also be referred to as gNB-side higher layer processing module which performs higher layer processing.
  • the other units than gNB scheduling module 194 in gNB 160 may perform physical layer processing.
  • the gNB operations module 182 may provide information 188 to the demodulator 1 72. For example, the gNB operations module 182 may inform the demodulator 172 of a modulation pattern anticipated for transmissions from the UE(s) 102.
  • the gNB operations module 182 may provide information 186 to the decoder 166. For example, the gNB operations module 182 may inform the decoder 166 of an anticipated encoding for transmissions from the UE(s) 102.
  • the gNB operations module 182 may provide information 101 to the encoder 109.
  • the information 101 may include data to be encoded and/or instructions for encoding.
  • the gNB operations module 182 may instruct the encoder 109 to encode information 101 , including transmission data 105.
  • the encoder 109 may encode transmission data 105 and/or other information included in the information 101 provided by the gNB operations module 182. For example, encoding the transmission data 105 and/or other information included in the information 101 may involve error detection and/or correction coding, mapping data to space, time and/or frequency resources for transmission, multiplexing, etc.
  • the encoder 109 may provide encoded data 1 1 1 to the modulator 1 13.
  • the transmission data 105 may include network data to be relayed to the UE
  • the gNB operations module 182 may provide information 103 to the modulator 1 13.
  • This information 103 may include instructions for the modulator 1 13.
  • the gNB operations module 182 may inform the modulator 1 13 of a modulation type (e.g., constellation mapping) to be used for transmissions to the UE(s) 102.
  • the modulator 1 13 may modulate the encoded data 1 1 1 to provide one or more modulated signals 1 15 to the one or more transmitters 1 17.
  • the gNB operations module 182 may provide information 192 to the one or more transmitters 1 17.
  • This information 192 may include instructions for the one or more transmitters 1 17.
  • the gNB operations module 182 may instruct the one or more transmitters 1 17 when to (or when not to) transmit a signal to the UE(s) 102.
  • the one or more transmitters 1 17 may upconvert and transmit the modulated signal(s) 1 15 to one or more UEs 102.
  • a DL subframe may be transmitted from the gNB 160 to one or more UEs 102 and that a UL subframe may be transmitted from one or more UEs 102 to the gNB 160. Furthermore, both the gNB 160 and the one or more UEs 102 may transmit data in a standard special slot.
  • one or more of the elements or parts thereof included in the gNB(s) 160 and UE(s) 102 may be implemented in hardware.
  • one or more of these elements or parts thereof may be implemented as a chip, circuitry or hardware components, etc.
  • one or more of the functions or methods described herein may be implemented in and/or performed using hardware.
  • one or more of the methods described herein may be implemented in and/or realized using a chipset, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a large-scale integrated circuit (LSI) or integrated circuit, etc.
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • LSI large-scale integrated circuit
  • the downlink physical layer processing of transport channels may include: Transport block CRC attachment; Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment; Channel coding (LDPC coding); Physical-layer hybrid-ARQ processing; Rate matching; Scrambling; Modulation (QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM and 256QAM); Layer mapping; and Mapping to assigned resources and antenna ports.
  • Transport block CRC attachment Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment
  • Channel coding LDPC coding
  • Physical-layer hybrid-ARQ processing Physical-layer hybrid-ARQ processing
  • Rate matching Scrambling; Modulation (QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM and 256QAM); Layer mapping; and Mapping to assigned resources and antenna ports.
  • Figure 2 illustrates various components that may be utilized in a UE 202.
  • the UE 202 described in connection with Figure 2 may be implemented in accordance with the UE 22 described in connection with Figure 1.
  • the UE 202 includes a processor 203 that controls operation of the UE 202.
  • the processor 203 may also be referred to as a central processing unit (CPU).
  • Memory 205 which may include read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), a combination of the two or any type of device that may store information, provides instructions 207a and data 209a to the processor 203.
  • a portion of the memory 205 may also include non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM). Instructions 207b and data 209b may also reside in the processor 203.
  • NVRAM non-volatile random access memory
  • Instructions 207b and/or data 209b loaded into the processor 203 may also include instructions 207a and/or data 209a from memory 205 that were loaded for execution or processing by the processor 203.
  • the instructions 207b may be executed by the processor 203 to implement the methods described above.
  • the UE 202 may also include a housing that contains one or more transmitters 258 and one or more receivers 220 to allow transmission and reception of data.
  • the transmitter(s) 258 and receiver(s) 220 may be combined into one or more transceivers 218.
  • One or more antennas 222a-n are attached to the housing and electrically coupled to the transceiver 218.
  • the various components of the UE 202 are coupled together by a bus system 21 1 , which may include a power bus, a control signal bus and a status signal bus, in addition to a data bus. However, for the sake of clarity, the various buses are illustrated in Figure 2 as the bus system 21 1.
  • the UE 202 may also include a digital signal processor (DSP) 213 for use in processing signals.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • the UE 202 may also include a communications interface 215 that provides user access to the functions of the UE 202.
  • the UE 202 illustrated in Figure 2 is a functional block diagram rather than a listing of specific components.
  • Figure 3 illustrates various components that may be utilized in a gNB 360.
  • the gNB 360 described in connection with Figure 3 may be implemented in accordance with the gNB 160 described in connection with Figure 1.
  • the gNB 360 includes a processor 303 that controls operation of the gNB 360.
  • the processor 303 may also be referred to as a central processing unit (CPU).
  • Memory 305 which may include read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), a combination of the two or any type of device that may store information, provides instructions 307a and data 309a to the processor 303.
  • a portion of the memory 305 may also include non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM). Instructions 307b and data 309b may also reside in the processor 303.
  • NVRAM non-volatile random access memory
  • Instructions 307b and/or data 309b loaded into the processor 303 may also include instructions 307a and/or data 309a from memory 305 that were loaded for execution or processing by the processor 303.
  • the instructions 307b may be executed by the processor 303 to implement the methods described above.
  • the gNB 360 may also include a housing that contains one or more transmitters 317 and one or more receivers 378 to allow transmission and reception of data.
  • the transmitter(s) 317 and receiver(s) 378 may be combined into one or more transceivers 376.
  • One or more antennas 380a-n are attached to the housing and electrically coupled to the transceiver 376.
  • the various components of the gNB 360 are coupled together by a bus system 31 1 , which may include a power bus, a control signal bus and a status signal bus, in addition to a data bus. However, for the sake of clarity, the various buses are illustrated in Figure 3 as the bus system 31 1.
  • the gNB 360 may also include a digital signal processor (DSP) 313 for use in processing signals.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • the gNB 360 may also include a communications interface 315 that provides user access to the functions of the gNB 360.
  • the gNB 360 illustrated in Figure 3 is a functional block diagram rather than a listing of specific components.
  • Figure 4 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of a UE 402 in which systems and methods for downlink and uplink transmissions may be implemented.
  • the UE 402 includes transmit means 458, receive means 420 and control means 424.
  • the transmit means 458, receive means 420 and control means 424 may be configured to perform one or more of the functions described in connection with Figure 1 above.
  • Figure 2 above illustrates one example of a concrete apparatus structure of Figure 4.
  • Other various structures may be implemented to realize one or more of the functions of Figure 1.
  • a DSP may be realized by software.
  • Figure 5 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of a gNB 560 in which systems and methods for downlink and uplink transmissions may be implemented.
  • the gNB 560 includes transmit means 51 7, receive means 578 and control means 582.
  • the transmit means 51 7, receive means 578 and control means 582 may be configured to perform one or more of the functions described in connection with Figure 1 above.
  • Figure 3 above illustrates one example of a concrete apparatus structure of Figure 5.
  • Other various structures may be implemented to realize one or more of the functions of Figure 1.
  • a DSP may be realized by software.
  • Figure 6 is a diagram illustrating one example of a resource grid.
  • the resource grid illustrated in Figure 6 may be applicable for both downlink and uplink and may be utilized in some implementations of the systems and methods disclosed herein. More detail regarding the resource grid is given in connection with Figure 1.
  • N m BB is bandwidth configuration of a bandwidth part (BWP) in the serving cell, expressed in multiples of N RB SC , where N RB S0 is a resource block 689 size in the frequency domain expressed as a number of subcarriers, and is the number of Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbols 687 in a subframe 669.
  • BWP bandwidth part
  • OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
  • a resource block 689 may include a number of resource elements (RE) 691.
  • RE resource elements
  • slots are numbered h m 3 e ⁇ 0, ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ , N SF S
  • N slot ' syiT1 b consecutive OFDM symbols in a slot where N 8 ⁇ o1,m 3nhL depends on the subcarrier spacing used as given by Table X2 for normal cyclic prefix and Table X3 for extended cyclic prefix.
  • the number of consecutive OFDM symbols per subframe is The start of slot hm 3 in a subframe is aligned in time with the start of OFDM symbol h m 3 the same subframe. Not all UEs may be capable of simultaneous transmission and reception, implying that not all OFDM symbols in a downlink slot or an uplink slot may be used. Table X2
  • N tl RB may be broadcast as a part of system information (e.g. Master Information Block (MIB), System Information Block Type 1 (SIB 1 )).
  • MIB Master Information Block
  • SIB 1 System Information Block Type 1
  • N m KB is configured by a RRC message dedicated to a UE 102.
  • the available RE 691 may be the RE 691 whose index /fulfils /3/ ds start and/or / data end 3/ in a subframe.
  • the OFDM access scheme with cyclic prefix may be employed, which may be also referred to as CP-OFDM.
  • CP cyclic prefix
  • PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • EPDCCH Enhanced Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • PDSCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • the RB is a unit for assigning downlink radio resources, defined by a predetermined bandwidth (RB bandwidth) and one slot.
  • Carrier resource blocks are numbered from 0 to N m KB -1 in the frequency domain for subcarrier spacing configuration m.
  • Physical resource blocks are defined within a carrier bandwidth part (BWP) and numbered from 0 to N slze BWp, -1 where / is the number of the carrier bandwidth part.
  • BWP carrier bandwidth part
  • Virtual resource blocks are defined within a carrier bandwidth part and numbered from 0 to N slze BWP ,--1 where / is the number of the carrier bandwidth part.
  • a carrier bandwidth part is a contiguous set of physical resource blocks, selected from a contiguous subset of the carrier resource blocks for a given numerology m on a given carrier.
  • a UE can be configured with up to four carrier bandwidth parts in the downlink with a single downlink carrier bandwidth part being active at a given time. The UE is not expected to receive PDSCH or PDCCH outside an active bandwidth part.
  • a UE can be configured with up to four carrier bandwidth parts in the uplink with a single uplink carrier bandwidth part being active at a given time.
  • the UE shall not transmit PUSCH or PUCCH outside an active bandwidth part.
  • the RB may include twelve sub-carriers in frequency domain and one or more OFDM symbols in time domain.
  • a region defined by one sub-carrier in frequency domain and one OFDM symbol in time domain is referred to as a resource element (RE) and is uniquely identified by the index pair (A,/ ⁇ 3 ) in the resource grid, where are indices in the frequency and time domains, respectively.
  • RE is uniquely identified by the index pair (k,t) based on a certain reference point, where / are indices in the time domain.
  • the reference point can be based on the resource grid, i.e. component carrier (CC) basis. Alternatively the reference point can be based on a certain band width part in the component carrier. While subframes in one CC are discussed herein, subframes are defined for each CC and subframes are substantially in synchronization with each other among CCs.
  • CC component carrier
  • SC-FDMA Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • DFT-S-OFDM Discrete Fourier Transform-Spreading OFDM
  • PUCCH, PDSCH, Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) and the like may be transmitted.
  • i RB is given by Table X4 and is DL or UL for downlink and uplink, respectively.
  • a UE 102 may be instructed to receive or transmit using a subset of the resource grid only.
  • the set of resource blocks a UE is referred to as a carrier bandwidth part and may be configured to receive or transmit upon are numbered from 0 to N m RB -1 in the frequency domain.
  • the UE may be configured with one or more carrier bandwidth parts, each of which may have the same or different numerology.
  • a UE 102 configured for operation in bandwidth parts (BWPs) of a serving cell is configured by higher layers for the serving cell a set of at most four bandwidth parts (BWPs) for receptions by the UE (DL BWP set) in a DL bandwidth by parameter DL-BWP-index and a set of at most four BWPs for transmissions by the UE 102 (UL BWP set) in an UL bandwidth by parameter UL-BWPHndex for the serving cell.
  • BWPs bandwidth parts
  • a DL BWP from the set of configured DL BWPs is linked to an UL BWP from the set of configured UL BWPs, where the DL BWP and the UL BWP have a same index in the respective sets.
  • a UE 102 can expect that the center frequency for a DL BWP is same as the center frequency for a UL BWP.
  • the Physical Downlink Control Channel can be used to schedule DL transmissions on PDSCH and UL transmissions on PUSCH, where the Downlink Control Information (DCI) on PDCCH includes: Downlink assignments containing at least modulation and coding format, resource allocation, and HARQ information related to DL-SCH; and Uplink scheduling grants containing at least modulation and coding format, resource allocation, and HARQ information related to UL-SCH.
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • PDCCH can be used to for: Activation and deactivation of configured PUSCH transmission with configured grant; Activation and deactivation of PDSCH semi-persistent transmission; Notifying one or more UEs of the slot format; Notifying one or more UEs of the PRB(s) and OFDM symbol(s) where the UE may assume no transmission is intended for the UE; Transmission of TPC commands for PUCCH and PUSCH; Transmission of one or more TPC commands for SRS transmissions by one or more UEs; Switching a UE’s active bandwidth part; and Initiating a random access procedure.
  • One or more sets of PRB(s) may be configured for DL control channel monitoring.
  • a control resource set is, in the frequency domain, a set of PRBs within which the UE 102 attempts to blindly decode downlink control information (i.e., monitor downlink control information (DCI)), where the PRBs may or may not be frequency contiguous, a UE 102 may have one or more control resource sets, and one DCI message may be located within one control resource set.
  • DCI monitor downlink control information
  • a PRB is the resource unit size (which may or may not include DMRS) for a control channel.
  • a DL shared channel may start at a later OFDM symbol than the one(s) which carries the detected DL control channel.
  • the DL shared channel may start at (or earlier than) an OFDM symbol than the last OFDM symbol which carries the detected DL control channel.
  • dynamic reuse of at least part of resources in the control resource sets for data for the same or a different UE 102, at least in the frequency domain may be supported.
  • a UE 102 may have to monitor a set of PDCCH candidates in one or more control resource sets on one or more activated serving cells or bandwidth parts (BWPs) according to corresponding search spaces where monitoring implies decoding each PDCCH candidate according to the monitored DCI formats.
  • the PDCCH candidates may be candidates for which the PDCCH may possibly be assigned and/or transmitted.
  • a PDCCH candidate is composed of one or more control channel elements (CCEs).
  • CCEs control channel elements
  • the set of PDCCH candidates that the UE 102 monitors may be also referred to as a search space or a search space set. That is, the search space (or search space set) is a set of resource that may possibly be used for PDCCH transmission.
  • a common search space (CSS) and a user-equipment search space (USS) are set (or defined, configured).
  • the CSS may be used for transmission of PDCCH with DCI format(s) to a plurality of the UEs 102. That is, the CSS may be defined by a resource common to a plurality of the UEs 102.
  • the CSS is composed of CCEs having numbers that are predetermined between the gNB 160 and the UE 102.
  • the CSS is composed of CCEs having indices 0 to 15.
  • the CSS may be used for transmission of PDCCH with DCI format(s) to a specific UE 102. That is, the gNB 160 may transmit, in the CSS, DCI format(s) intended for a plurality of the UEs 102 and/or DCI format(s) intended for a specific UE 102.
  • Type 0 PDCCH CSS may be defined for a DCI format scrambled by a System Information-Radio Network Temporary Identifier (SI-RNTI) on a primary cell (PCell).
  • SI-RNTI System Information-Radio Network Temporary Identifier
  • Type 1 PDCCH CSS may be defined for a DCI format scrambled by a Random Access- (RA-)RNTI.
  • Type 1 PDCCH CSS may be used for a DCI format scrambled by a Temporary Cell- (TC-)RNTI or Cell- (C-)RNTI.
  • Type 2 PDCCH CSS may be defined for a DCI format scrambled by a Paging- (P-)RNTI.
  • Type 3 PDCCH CSS may be defined for a DCI format scrambled by an Interference- (INT-)RNTI, where if a UE 102 is configured by higher layers to decode a DCI format with CRC scrambled by the INT-RNTI and if the UE 102 detects the DCI format with CRC scrambled by the INT-RNTI, the UE 102 may assume that no transmission to the UE 102 is present in OFDM symbols and resource blocks indicated by the DCI format.
  • INT- Interference-
  • Type 3 PDCCH CSS may be used for a DCI format scrambled by the other RNTI (e.g., Transmit Power Control- (TPC-)RNTI, Pre-emption Indication- (PI-)RNTI, Slot Format Indicator- (SFI-)RNTI, Semi persistent scheduling- (SPS-)RNTI, Grant free- (GF-)RNTI, Configured Scheduling- (CS-)RNTI, URLLC- (U-)RNTI), Autonomous Uplink- (AUL-) RNTI, Downlink Feedback Information- (DFI-) RNTI.
  • TPC- Transmit Power Control-
  • PI- Pre-emption Indication-
  • SFI- Slot Format Indicator-
  • SPS- Semi persistent scheduling-
  • Grant free- GF-
  • CS- Configured Scheduling-
  • URLLC- U-
  • AUL- Autonomous Uplink-
  • DFI- Downlink Feedback Information-
  • a UE 102 may be indicated by System Information Block TypeO (SIB0), which is also referred to as MIB, a control resource set for TypeO-PDCCH common search space and a subcarrier spacing and a CP length for PDCCH reception.
  • SIB0 System Information Block TypeO
  • the TypeO-PDCCH common search space is defined by the CCE aggregation levels and the number of candidates per CCE aggregation level.
  • the UE may assume that the DMRS antenna port associated with PDCCH reception in the TypeO-PDCCH common search space and the DMRS antenna port associated with Physical Broadcast channel (PBCH) reception are quasi-collocated with respect to delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average delay, and spatial Rx parameters.
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast channel
  • PBCH carries Master Information Block (MIB) which contains most important pieces of system information.
  • MIB Master Information Block
  • a PDCCH with a certain DCI format in TypeO-PDCCH common search space schedules a reception of a PDSCH with SIB Typel (SIB 1 ) or with other SI messages.
  • SIB 1 SIB Typel
  • a UE may be indicated by SIB1 control resource set(s) for Typel -PDCCH common search space.
  • a subcarrier spacing and a CP length for PDCCH reception with Typel -PDCCH common search space are same as for PDCCH reception with TypeO-PDCCH common search space.
  • the UE may assume that the DMRS antenna port associated with PDCCH reception in the Typel -PDCCH common search space and the DMRS antenna port associated with PBCH reception are quasi-collocated with respect to delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average delay, and spatial Rx parameters.
  • a monitoring periodicity of paging occasions for PDCCH in Type2 ⁇ PDCCH common search space may be configured to the UE by higher layer parameter.
  • a UE may be configured by higher layer signaling whether and/or which serving cell(s) to monitor Type3-PDCCH common search space.
  • the USS may be used for transmission of PDCCH with DCI format(s) to a specific UE 102.
  • the USS is defined by a resource dedicated to a certain UE 102. That is, the USS may be defined independently for each UE 102.
  • the USS may be composed of CCEs having numbers that are determined based on a RNTI assigned by the gNB 1 60, a slot number in a radio frame, an aggregation level, or the like.
  • the RNTI(s) may include C-RNTI (Cell-RNTI), Temporary C-RNTI.
  • the USS (the position(s) of the USS) may be configured by the gNB 160.
  • the gNB 160 may configure the USS by using the RRC message. That is, the base station may transmit, in the USS, DCI format(s) intended for a specific UE 102.
  • the RNTI assigned to the UE 102 may be used for transmission of DCI (transmission of PDCCH).
  • CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
  • CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
  • the UE 102 may attempt to decode DCI to which the CRC parity bits scrambled by the RNTI are attached, and detects PDCCH (i.e., DCI, DCI format). That is, the UE 102 may decode PDCCH with the CRC scrambled by the RNTI.
  • a control channel candidate may be mapped to multiple OFDM symbols or may be mapped to a single OFDM symbol.
  • One DL control channel element may be mapped on REs defined by a single PRB and a single OFDM symbol. If more than one DL control channel elements are used for a single DL control channel transmission, DL control channel element aggregation may be performed.
  • the number of aggregated DL control channel elements is referred to as DL control channel element aggregation level.
  • the DL control channel element aggregation level may be 1 or 2 to the power of an integer.
  • the gNB 160 may inform a UE 102 of which control channel candidates are mapped to each subset of OFDM symbols in the control resource set. If one DL control channel is mapped to a single OFDM symbol and does not span multiple OFDM symbols, the DL control channel element aggregation is performed within an OFDM symbol, namely multiple DL control channel elements within an OFDM symbol are aggregated. Otherwise, DL control channel elements in different OFDM symbols can be aggregated.
  • DCI formats may be classified into at least 4 types, DL regular (also referred to as DCI format 1_1 ), UL regular (also referred to as DCI format 0_1 ), DL fallback (also referred to as DCI format 1_0) and UL fallback (also referred to as DCI format 0_0) for PDSCH and PUSCH scheduling.
  • DL regular also referred to as DCI format 1_1
  • UL regular also referred to as DCI format 0_1
  • DL fallback also referred to as DCI format 1_0
  • UL fallback also referred to as DCI format 0_0
  • DCI format 0_0 may be defined for scheduling of one or more PUSCH(s) and one or more PDSCH(s), which may be applicable to an NR-based unlicensed access (NR-U) cell.
  • Table X5 shows an example of a set of the DCI format types.
  • the DL regular DCI format and the UL regular DCI format may have a same DCI payload size.
  • the DL fallback DCI format and the UL fallback DCI format may have a same DCI payload size.
  • Table X6, X7, X8, and X9 show examples of DCI formats 0_0, 0_1 , 1_0 and 1_1 , respectively.“Mandatory” may mean the information field is always present irrespective of RRC (re)configuration. “Optional” may mean the information field may or may not be present depending on RRC (re)configuration. In the DL fallback DCI format and the UL fallback DCI format, all information fields are mandatory so that their DCI payload sizes are fixed irrespective of RRC (re)configuration.
  • a RE of the basic numerology is defined with subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz in frequency domain and 2048KTS + CP length (e.g., 51 2KTS, 1 60KTS or 144KTS) in time domain, where Ts denotes a baseband sampling time unit defined as 1 /(15000*2048) seconds.
  • the symbol length is 2048*2 _m kT5 + CP length (e.g., 51 2*2 KTS, 160*2 _tJ KTs or 144*2 ⁇ m kT5).
  • K 64, other words, the subcarrier spacing of the m+1 -th numerology is a double of the one for the m-th numerology, and the symbol length of the m+1 -th numerology is a half of the one for the m-th numerology.
  • Figure 7 shows four numerologies, but the system may support another number of numerologies.
  • Figure 8 shows a set of examples of subframe structures for the numerologies that are shown in Figure 7. These examples are based on the slot configuration set to 0.
  • a slot includes 14 symbols, the slot length of the m+1 -th numerology is a half of the one for the m-th numerology, and eventually the number of slots in a subframe (i.e., 1 ms) becomes double.
  • a radio frame may include 10 subframes, and the radio frame length may be equal to 10 ms.
  • Figure 9 shows another set of examples of subframe structures for the numerologies that are shown in Figure 7. These examples are based on the slot configuration set to 1.
  • a slot includes 7 symbols, the slot length of the m+1 -th numerology is a half of the one for the m-th numerology, and eventually the number of slots in a subframe (i.e., 1 ms) becomes double.
  • a downlink physical channel may correspond to a set of resource elements carrying information originating from higher layers.
  • the downlink physical channels may include Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH), Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH), Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH).
  • PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • a downlink physical signal corresponds to a set of resource elements used by the physical layer but might not carry information originating from higher layers.
  • the downlink physical signals may include Demodulation reference signals (DM-RS), Phase-tracking reference signals (PT-RS), Channel-state information reference signal (CSI-RS) Primary synchronization signal (PSS), Secondary synchronization signal (SSS).
  • DM-RS Demodulation reference signals
  • PT-RS Phase-tracking reference signals
  • CSI-RS Channel-state information reference signal
  • PSS Primary synchronization signal
  • SSS Secondary synchronization signal
  • An uplink physical channel may correspond to a set of resource elements carrying information originating from
  • the uplink physical channels may include Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH), Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH), Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH).
  • PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel
  • PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel
  • PRACH Physical Random Access Channel
  • An uplink physical signal is used by the physical layer but might not carry information originating from higher layers.
  • the uplink physical signals may include Demodulation reference signals (DM-RS), Phase-tracking reference signals (PT-RS), Sounding reference signal (SRS).
  • DM-RS Demodulation reference signals
  • PT-RS Phase-tracking reference signals
  • SRS Sounding reference signal
  • the Synchronization Signal and PBCH block may consist of primary and secondary synchronization signals (PSS, SSS), each occupying 1 symbol and 127 subcarriers, and PBCH spanning across 3 OFDM symbols and 240 subcarriers, but on one symbol leaving an unused part in the middle for SSS.
  • PSS and SSS may be located in different OFDM symbols in between one OFDM symbol gap, with PSS first, then SSS.
  • the periodicity of the SSB can be configured by the network and the time locations where SSB can be sent are determined by sub-carrier spacing. Within the frequency span of a carrier, multiple SSBs can be transmitted.
  • PCIs Physical cell identities
  • SIB1 also known as remaining minimum system information (RMSI)
  • RMSI remaining minimum system information
  • CDGI Cell Global Identifier
  • a PCell may be always associated to a CD-SSB located on the synchronization raster.
  • SFI Slot format indicator
  • the UE 102 may be able to derive at least which symbols in a given slot that are ‘DL’ , ‘UL’ , and ‘unknown’ , respectively. In addition, it may also indicate which symbols in a given slot that are ‘reserved’ . With SFI, the UE 102 may also be able to derive the number of slots for which the SFI indicates their formats.
  • SFI may be configured by dedicated RRC configuration message. Alternatively and/or additionally, SFI may be signaled by a group-common PDCCH (e.g., PDCCH with SFI-RNTI). Yet alternatively and/or additionally, SFI may be broadcasted via master information block (MIB) or remaining minimum system information (RMSI).
  • MIB master information block
  • RMSI remaining minimum system information
  • each SFI can express up to 8 combinations of ‘DL’, ‘UL’ , ‘Unknown’ and ‘reserved’ , each combination includes N 8
  • o *' m 5nitL pieces of symbol types. More specifically, given that 14, one combination may be ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’’ ‘Unknown’’
  • Yet another combination may be all ‘UL, that is
  • Yet another combination may be a combination of ‘DL’ , ‘UL’ and ‘Reserved’ such as ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘Reserved’ ‘Reserved’
  • ‘DL’ symbols may be available for DL receptions and CSI/RRM measurements at the UE 102 side.
  • ‘UL’ symbols may be available for UL transmissions at the UE 102 side.
  • ‘Unknown’ resource may also be referred to as ‘Flexible’ and can be overridden by at least by DCI indication. ‘Unknown’ may be used to achieve the same as ‘Reserved’ if not overridden by DCI and/or SFI indication.
  • UE 102 may be allowed to assume any DL and UL transmissions which are configured by higher-layer, unless overridden by DCI indicating the other direction, and any DL and UL transmissions indicated by DCI.
  • periodic CSI-RS For example, periodic CSI-RS, periodic CSHM, semi-persistently scheduled CSI-RS, periodic CSI reporting, semi-persistently scheduled CSI reporting, periodic SRS transmission, higher-layer configured Primary synchronization signal (PSS) / secondary SS (SSS) / PBCH can be assumed (i.e. for DL, assumed to be present and to be able to perform the reception, and for UL, assumed to be able to perform the transmission).
  • PSS Primary synchronization signal
  • SSS secondary SS
  • the overriding of ‘Unknown’ symbols by the DCI means that UE 102 may have to assume only DL and UL transmissions (PDSCH transmission, PUSCH transmission, aperiodic CSI-RS transmission, aperiodic CSHM resource, aperiodic SRS transmission) which are indicated by DCI indications.
  • the overriding of ‘Unknown’ symbols by the SFI means that UE 102 may have to assume the symbols as either ‘DL’ , ‘UL’ , or ‘Reserved’ according to SFI indications.
  • the UE 102 may perform CSI and/or RRM measurement based on the aperiodic CSI-RS transmission and/or aperiodic CSHM resource. If the UE 102 does not assume aperiodic CSI-RS transmission and/or aperiodic CSHM resource, the UE 102 may not use the aperiodic CSI-RS transmission and/or aperiodic CSHM resource for CSI and/or RRM measurement.
  • the UE 102 may have to monitor PDCCH on some ‘DL’ or ‘Unknown’ symbols. There may be several options to monitor PDCCH. If all of the OFDM symbols which are assigned for a given control resource set (CORESET) are ‘DL’ , the UE 102 may assume all of the OFDM symbols are valid for monitoring of a PDCCH associated with the given CORESET. In this case, the UE 102 may assume each PDCCH candidate in the CORESET is mapped to all of the OFDM symbols for time-first RE group (REG)-to-control channel element (CCE) mapping.
  • REG time-first RE group
  • CCE control channel element
  • the UE 102 may assume all of the OFDM symbols are valid for monitoring of a PDCCH associated with the given CORESET. In this case, the UE 102 may assume each PDCCH candidate in the CORESET is mapped to all of the OFDM symbols for time-first REG-to-CCE mapping.
  • the UE 102 may assume those OFDM symbols are not valid for monitoring of a PDCCH associated with the given combination of CORESET and search space set. If some of the OFDM symbols which are assigned for a given combination of CORESET and search space set are ‘DL’ and the others are ‘UL’ or ‘Reserved’ or if some of the OFDM symbols which are assigned for a given combination of CORESET and search space set are ‘Unknown’ and the others are ‘UL’ or ‘Reserved’, the UE 102 may not monitor PDCCH in the CORESET.
  • NR-U may not support RMSI and/ or dedicated RRC configuration of slot format. In this case, all symbols are considered to be Flexible as default.
  • FIG 10 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of a gNB 1060 (an example of the gNB 160).
  • the gNB 1060 may include a higher layer processor 1001 (also referred to as higher layer processing circuitry), a DL transmitter 1002, a UL receiver 1003, and antennas 1004.
  • the DL transmitter 1002 may include a PDCCH transmitter 1005 and a PDSCH transmitter 1006.
  • the UL receiver 1003 may include a PUCCH receiver 1007 and a PUSCH receiver 1008.
  • the higher layer processor 1001 may manage physical layer’s behaviors (the DL transmitter’s and the UL receiver’ s behaviors, LBT, etc) and provide higher layer parameters to the physical layer.
  • the higher layer processor 1001 may obtain transport blocks from the physical layer.
  • the higher layer processor 1001 may send/acquire higher layer messages such as a common and dedicated RRC messages and/or MAC messages to/from a UE’ s higher layer.
  • the higher layer processor 1001 may also set and/or store higher layer parameters carried by the higher layer messages.
  • the higher layer processor 1001 may provide the PDSCH transmitter 1006 transport blocks and provide the PDCCH transmitter 1005 transmission parameters related to the transport blocks.
  • the UL receiver 1003 may receive multiplexed uplink physical channels and uplink physical signals via receiving antennas and de-multiplex them.
  • the PUCCH receiver 1007 may provide the higher layer processor UCI.
  • the PUSCH receiver 1008 may provide the higher layer processor 1001 received transport blocks.
  • the UL receiver 1003 may also sense a downlink channel where the DL transmitter 1002 would perform downlink transmissions.
  • FIG. 1 1 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of a UE 1 102 (an example of the UE 102).
  • the UE 1 102 may include a higher layer processor 1 1 1 1 , a UL transmitter 1 1 13, a DL receiver 1 1 12, and antennas 1 1 14.
  • the UL transmitter 1 1 13 may include a PUCCH transmitter 1 1 17 and a PUSCH transmitter 1 1 18.
  • the DL receiver 1 1 12 may include a PDCCH receiver 1 1 15 and a PDSCH receiver 1 1 16.
  • the higher layer processor 1 1 1 1 may manage physical layer’ s behaviors (the UL transmitter’ s and the DL receiver’ s behaviors, LBT, etc) and provide higher layer parameters to the physical layer.
  • the higher layer processor 1 1 1 1 may obtain transport blocks from the physical layer.
  • the higher layer processor 1 1 1 1 may send/acquire higher layer messages such as a common and dedicated RRC messages and/or MAC messages to/from a UE’ s higher layer.
  • the higher layer processor 1 1 1 1 may also set and/or store higher layer parameters carried by the higher layer messages.
  • the higher layer processor 1 1 1 1 may provide the PUSCH transmitter transport blocks and provide the PUCCH transmitter 1 1 17 UCI.
  • the DL receiver 1 1 12 may receive multiplexed downlink physical channels and downlink physical signals via receiving antennas and de-multiplex them.
  • the PDCCH receiver 1 1 15 may provide the higher layer processor DCI.
  • the PDSCH receiver 1 1 16 may provide the higher layer processor 1 1 1 1 received transport blocks.
  • the DL receiver 1 12 may also sense an uplink channel where the UL transmitter 1 1 13 would perform uplink transmissions.
  • the UE 1 102 may attempt blind decoding of one or more PDCCH (also referred to just as control channel) candidates. This procedure is also referred to as monitoring of PDCCH.
  • the PDCCH may carry DCI format which schedules PDSCH (also referred to just as shared channel or data channel).
  • the gNB 1060 may transmit PDCCH and the corresponding PDSCH in a downlink slot. Upon the detection of the PDCCH in a downlink slot, the UE 1 102 may receive the corresponding PDSCH in the downlink slot. Otherwise, the UE 1 102 may not perform PDSCH reception in the downlink slot.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates an example of control resource unit and reference signal structure.
  • a control resource set may be defined, in frequency domain, as a set of physical resource block(s) (PRBs).
  • PRBs physical resource block
  • a control resource set may include PRB#i to PRB#i+3 in frequency domain.
  • the control resource set may also be defined, in time domain, as a set of OFDM symbol(s). It may also be referred to as a duration of the control resource set or just control resource set duration.
  • a control resource set may include three OFDM symbols, OFDM symbol#0 to OFDM symbol#2, in time domain.
  • the UE 102 may monitor PDCCH in one or more control resource sets.
  • the PRB set may be configured with respect to each control resource set through dedicated RRC signaling (e.g., via dedicated RRC reconfiguration).
  • the control resource set duration may also be configured with respect to each control resource set through dedicated RRC signaling.
  • control resource units are defined as a set of resource elements (REs).
  • Each control resource unit includes all REs (i.e., 12 REs) within a single OFDM symbol and within a single PRB (i.e., consecutive 12 subcarriers).
  • REs on which reference signals (RSs) are mapped may be counted as those REs, but the REs for RSs are not available for PDCCH transmission and the PDCCH are not mapped on the REs for RSs.
  • Multiple control resource units may be used for a transmission of a single PDCCH.
  • one PDCCH may be mapped the REs which are included in multiple control resource units.
  • Figure 12 shows the example that the UE 102 performing blind decoding of PDCCH candidates assuming that multiple control resource units located in the same frequency carries one PDCCH.
  • PDCCH demodulation may be contained in all of the resource units on which the PDCCH is mapped.
  • the REs for the RS may not be available for either the PDCCH transmission or the corresponding PDSCH transmission.
  • Figure 13 illustrates an example of control channel and shared channel multiplexing.
  • the starting and/or ending position(s) of PDSCH may be indicated via the scheduling PDCCH.
  • the DCI format which schedule PDSCH may include information field(s) for indicating the starting and/or ending position(s) of the scheduled PDSCH.
  • the UE 102 may include a higher layer processor which is configured to acquire a common and/or dedicated higher layer message.
  • the common and/or dedicated higher layer message may include system information and/or information for higher layer configuration/reconfiguration. Based on the system information and/or higher layer configuration, the UE 102 performs physical layer reception and/or transmission procedures.
  • the UE 102 may also include PDCCH receiving circuitry which is configured to monitor a PDCCH.
  • the PDCCH may carry a DCI format which schedule a PDSCH. Additionally and/or alternatively the PDCCH may carry a DCI format which schedule a PUSCH.
  • the UE 102 may also include PDSCH receiving circuitry which is configured to receive the PDSCH upon the detection of the corresponding PDCCH.
  • the UE 102 may also include PUCCH transmitting circuitry which is configured to transmit the PUCCH carrying HARQ-ACK feedback related to the PDSCH. Additionally and/or alternatively the UE 102 may also include PUSCH transmitting circuitry which is configured to transmit the PUSCH upon the detection of the corresponding PDCCH.
  • the gNB 160 may include a higher layer processor which is configured to send a common and/or dedicated higher layer message.
  • the common and/or dedicated higher layer message may include system information and/or information for higher layer configuration/reconfiguration. Based on the system information and/or higher layer configuration, the gNB 160 performs physical layer reception and/or transmission procedures.
  • the gNB 160 may also include PDCCH transmitting circuitry which is configured to transmit a PDCCH.
  • the PDCCH may carry DCI format which schedule a PDSCH. Additionally and/or alternatively, the PDCCH may carry DCI format which schedule a PUSCH.
  • the gNB 160 may also include PDSCH transmitting circuitry which is configured to transmit the PDSCH upon the transmission of the corresponding PDCCH.
  • the gNB 160 may also include PUCCH receiving circuitry which is configured to receive the PUCCH carrying HARQ-ACK feedback related to the PDSCH. Additionally and/or alternatively the gNB 160 may also include PUSCH receiving circuitry which is configured to receive the PUSCH upon the detection of the corresponding PDCCH.
  • UE 102 may monitor PDCCH candidates in a control resource set.
  • the set of PDCCH candidates may be also referred to as search space.
  • the control resource set may be defined by a PRB set in frequency domain and a duration in units of OFDM symbol in time domain.
  • higher layer signaling such as common RRC messages or UE dedicated RRC messages may configure the UE 102 with one or more PRB set(s) for PDCCH monitoring.
  • higher layer signaling such as common RRC messages or UE dedicated RRC messages may also configure the UE 102 with the control resource set duration for PDCCH monitoring.
  • higher layer signaling configures a UE with A* control resource sets.
  • control resource set p 0 p ⁇ ,P
  • the configuration includes: a first symbol index provided by higher layer parameter CORESET-start-symb; the number of consecutive symbols provided by higher layer parameter CORESET-time-duration; a set of resource blocks provided by higher layer parameter CORESET-freq-dom; a CCE-to-REG mapping provided by higher layer parameter CORESET-trans-type (also referred to as CORESET-CCE-to-REG-mapping); a REG bundle size, in case of interleaved CCE-to-REG mapping, provided by higher layer parameter CORESET-REG-bundle-size; and antenna port quasi-collocation provided by higher layer parameter CORESET-TCI-StateRefld.
  • the UE may assume that the DMRS antenna port associated with PDCCH reception in the USS and the DMRS antenna port associated with PBCH reception are quasi-collocated with respect to delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average delay, and spatial Rx parameters.
  • the UE For each serving cell and for each DCI format with CRC scrambled by C-RNTI, SPS-RNTI and/or grant-free RNTI that a UE is configured to monitor PDCCH, the UE is configured with associations to control resource sets.
  • the associations may include associations to a set of control resource sets by higher layer parameter DCI-to-CORESET-map.
  • the UE 102 may assume that non-slot based scheduling is configured in addition to slot-based scheduling, if the UE 102 is configured with higher layer parameter CORESET-monitor-DCI-symbolPattern.
  • the UE 102 may assume that non-slot based scheduling is not configured but slot-based scheduling only, if the UE 102 is not configured with higher layer parameter CORESET-monitor-DCI-symbolPattern.
  • FIG 14 illustrates PDCCH monitoring occasions for slot-based scheduling (also referred to as Type A resource allocation).
  • PDCCH monitoring occasions may be OFDM symbols on which the PDCCH monitoring is configured by a search space configuration.
  • a search space set may be identified for a combination of a control resource set, a DCI format (or DCI format group including DCI format having a same DCI payload size).
  • search space set #0 and #1 two search space sets are seen, search space set #0 and #1. Both search space set #0 and #1 are associated with a same CORESET.
  • the configuration of the CORESET such as CORESET-start-symb, CORESET-time-duration, CORESET-freq-dom, CORESET-trans-type, CORESET-REG-bundle-size, CORESET-TCI-StateRefld apply to both search space set #0 and #1.
  • CORESET-time-duration set to 3 symbols applies to both of them.
  • Search space set #0 may be associated with a certain DCI format (e.g., DCI format 1 , fallback DCI format), and search space set #1 may be associated with another certain DCI format (e.g., DCI format 2, regular DCI format).
  • the higher layer parameter CORESET-monitor-period-DCI is set to 2 slots for search space set #0, while the higher layer parameter CORESET-monitor-period-DCI is set to 1 slot for search space set #1. Therefore, DCI format 1 may be potentially transmitted and/or monitored in every 2 slot, while DCI format 2 may be potentially transmitted and/or monitored in every slot.
  • Figure 15 illustrates PDCCH monitoring occasions for non-slot-based scheduling.
  • two search space sets are seen, search space set #2 and #3. Both search space set #2 and #3 are associated with a same CORESET. This CORESET may or may not be the same CORESET as in Figure 15.
  • the higher layer parameters CORESET-monitor-period-DCI for both search space set #2 and #3 are set to 1 slot.
  • the CORESET-monitor-DCI-symbolPattern are individually configured to search space set #2 and #3.
  • the higher layer parameter CORESET-monitor-DCI-symbolPattern may indicate, using a bitmap scheme, OFDM symbol(s) on which PDCCH is monitored.
  • the higher layer parameter CORESET-monitor-DCI-symbolPattern per search space set may include 14 bits, the 1 st bit to 14 th bit which correspond to OFDM symbol #0 to #13, respectively. Each of the bits indicates whether or not PDCCH is monitored on the corresponding OFDM symbol (e.g.,“0” indicates no PDCCH monitoring and “1” indicates PDCCH monitoring, or vice versa).
  • the higher layer parameters CORESET-monitor-DCI-symbolPattern for search space set #2 indicates OFDM symbols #0 and #7 for PDCCH monitoring
  • the higher layer parameters CORESET-monitor-DCI-symbolPattern for search space set #3 indicates OFDM symbols #0, #2, #4, #6, #8, #10, #12 for PDCCH monitoring. It is noted that these
  • PDCCH monitoring applies to the slot that is specified by
  • a control-channel element may include 6 resource-element groups (REGs) where a resource-element group equals one resource block during one OFDM symbol.
  • Resource-element groups within a control-resource set may be numbered in increasing order in a time-first manner, starting with 0 for the first OFDM symbol and the lowest-numbered resource block in the control resource set.
  • a UE can be configured with multiple control-resource sets. Each control-resource set may be associated with one CCE-to-REG mapping only.
  • the CCE-to-REG mapping for a control-resource set can be interleaved or non-interleaved, configured by the higher-layer parameter CORESET-CCE-REG-mapping-type.
  • the REG bundle size is configured by the higher-layer parameter CORESET-REG-bundle-size. For non-interleaved CCE-to-REG mapping, the REG bundle size is 6.
  • the REG bundle size is either 2 or 6 for a CORESET with CORESET-time-duration set to 1
  • the REG bundle size is either N C0RESET symb or 6 for a CORESET with CORESET-time-duration N C0RESET symb set to greater than 1.
  • the UE may assume: the same precoding in the frequency domain being used within a REG bundle if the higher-layer parameter CORESET-precoder-granularity equals CORESET-REG-bundle-size; and the same precoding in the frequency domain being used across within contiguous RBs in CORESET if the higher-layer parameter CORESET-precoder-granularity equals the number of contiguous RBs in the frequency domain within CORESET.
  • Each control resource set includes a set of CCEs numbered from 0 to Ncc E,p,kp ⁇ 1 where N C c E,p,kP is the number of CCEs in control resource set p in monitoring period k p .
  • the sets of PDCCH candidates that a UE monitors are defined in terms of PDCCH UE-specific search spaces.
  • a PDCCH UE-specific search space S (L) kp at CCE aggregation level L is defined by a set of PDCCH candidates for CCE aggregation level L.
  • L can be one of 1 , 2, 4, and 8.
  • PDSCH and/or PUSCH RE mapping may be affected by higher layer signaling and/or layer-1 signaling such as a PDCCH with a DCI format 1 and 2.
  • modulated complex-valued symbols may be mapped in REs which meet all of the following criteria: they are in the resource blocks assigned for transmission; they are declared as available for PDSCH according to rate matching resource set configuration and/or indication; they are not used for CSI-RS; they are not used for Phase Tracking RS (PT-RS); they are not reserved for SS/PBCH; they are not declared as ‘reserved’ .
  • a UE may be configured with any of higher layer parameters: rate-match- PDSCH-resource-set including one or multiple reserved pairs of RBs (higher layer parameter rate-match-PDSCH-resource-RBs which is also referred to as bitmap-1 ) and reserved symbols (higher layer parameters rate-match-PDSCH-resource-symbols which is also referred to as bitmap-2) for which the reserved RBs apply; rate-match-resources-v-shift including LTE-CRS-vshift(s); rate-match-resources-antenna-port including LTE-CRS antenna ports 1 , 2 or 4 ports; rate-match-CORESET including CORESET-ID(s) of CORESET configured to a UE 102 for monitoring.
  • rate-match- PDSCH-resource-set including one or multiple reserved pairs of RBs (higher layer parameter rate-match-PDSCH-resource-RBs which is also referred to as bitmap-1 ) and reserved symbols (higher layer parameters rate
  • the UE 102 may have to determine the PDSCH RE mapping according to the union of provided rate-matching configurations. To decode PDSCH a UE 102 rate-matches around the REs corresponding to detected PDCCH that scheduled the PDSCH. A UE 102 may not be expected to handle the case where PDSCH DMRS REs are over-lapping, even partially, with any RE(s) indicated by the rate-matching configuration rate-match-PDSCH-resource-set and rate-match-resources-v-shift and rate-match-resources-antenna-port and rate-match-CORESET.
  • a UE 102 may generate one corresponding HARQ-ACK information bit. If a UE 102 is not provided higher layer parameter PDSCH-CodeB/ockGroup Transmission, the UE 102 may generate one HARQ-ACK information bit per transport block. A UE 102 is not expected to be indicated to transmit HARQ-ACK information for more than two SPS PDSCH receptions in a same PUCCH.
  • UE 102 may be configured with higher layer parameter pdsch ⁇ HARQ-ACK ⁇ Codebook which indicates PDSCH HARQ-ACK codebook type.
  • the PDSCH HARQ-ACK codebook may be either semi-static (also referred to as Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook) or dynamic (also referred to as Type-2 HARQ-ACK codebook). This may be applicable to both CA and none CA operation and may correspond to L1 parameter ’HARQ-ACK-codebook’.
  • a UE 102 may report HARQ-ACK information for a corresponding PDSCH reception or SPS PDSCH release only in a HARQ-ACK codebook that the UE transmits in a slot indicated by a value of a PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field in a corresponding DCI format (e.g. DCI format 1_0 or DCI format 1 _1 ). If the UE 102 receives the PDCCH or SPS PDSCH release successfully, a value of the corresponding HARQ-ACK information bit may be basically set to ACK. If the UE 102 does not receive the PDCCH or SPS PDSCH release successfully (i.e.
  • the value of the corresponding HARQ-ACK information bit may be basically set to NACK.
  • a UE may determine a HARQ-ACK codebook only for the SPS PDSCH release or only the PDSCH reception., e.g. one-bit HARQ-ACK codebook. Otherwise, the HARQ-ACK codebook may be more than one bit.
  • a HARQ-ACK information bit may be automatically set to a fixed value (e.g. NACK, or ACK) without referring to PDSCH reception or SPS PDSCH release reception.
  • a fixed value e.g. NACK, or ACK
  • the UE 102 may report NACK value(s) for HARQ-ACK information bit(s) in a HARQ-ACK codebook that the UE transmits in a slot not indicated by a value of a PDSCH -to ⁇ HARQ_feedback timing indicator field in a corresponding DCI format (e.g. DCI format 1_0 or DCI format 1_1 ).
  • HARQ-ACK information bit may be automatically set to a fixed value (e.g. NACK, or ACK) without referring to PDSCH reception or SPS PDSCH release reception is that, if an occasion for a candidate PDSCH reception can be in response to a PDCCH with a DCI format (e.g.
  • DCI format 1 _1 DCI format 1 _1
  • the HARQ-ACK information is associated with the first transport block and the UE 102 may generate a NACK for the second transport block if higher layer parameter harq-ACK-SpatialBundlingPUCCH is not provided and may generate HARQ-ACK information with value of ACK for the second transport block if higher layer parameter harq-A CKSpatialBundlingPUCCH is provided.
  • HARQ-ACK information bit may be automatically set to a fixed value (e.g. NACK, or ACK) without referring to PDSCH reception or SPS PDSCH release reception is that, if the UE 102 is configured by higher layer parameter maxNrofCodeWordsScheduhdByDCI with reception of two transport blocks for the active DL BWP of serving cell c, and if the UE 102 receives one transport block, the UE 102 may assume ACK for the second transport block.
  • a fixed value e.g. NACK, or ACK
  • HARQ-ACK information bit may be automatically set to a fixed value (e.g. NACK, or ACK) without referring to PDSCH reception or SPS PDSCH release reception
  • the UE 102 may set to NACK value in the HARQ-ACK codebook any HARQ-ACK information corresponding to PDSCH reception or SPS PDSCH release scheduled by DCI format (e.g. DCI format 1_0 or DCI format 1_1 ) that the UE 102 detects in a PDCCH monitoring occasion that is after a PDCCH monitoring occasion where the UE detects a DCI format (e.g. DCI format 1_0 or DCI format 1_1 ) scheduling the PUSCH transmission.
  • DCI format e.g. DCI format 1_0 or DCI format 1_1
  • NR may support code block group based transmission(s) for PDSCH and
  • the UE 102 may receive PDSCHs that include code block groups (CBGs) of a transport block and the UE 102 may be provided higher layer parameter maxCodeBlockGroupsPerTransportBlock indicating a maximum number JV H “ Q B ' ACK °f CBGs for generating respective HARQ-ACK information bits for a transport block reception for the serving cell, where for the number of C code blocks (CBs) in a transport block, the UE 102 may determine the number of CBGs as
  • a value of the HARQ-ACK information bit corresponding the CBG may be basically set to ACK. If the UE 102 does not successfully decode (i.e. fails to decode) at least one CG in the given CBG of the TB, a value of the HARQ-ACK information bit corresponding the CBG may be basically set to NACK. In addition, in some cases, a HARQ-ACK information bit for a given CBG may be automatically set to a fixed value (e.g. NACK, or ACK) without referring to the reception of the associated CB(s).
  • a fixed value e.g. NACK, or ACK
  • the HARQ-ACK codebook includes the A ⁇ S RQ ⁇ ACK HARQ-ACK information bits and, if a transport block, the
  • UE 102 may generate a NACK value for the last HARQ-ACK information bits for the transport block in the HARQ-ACK codebook.
  • a HARQ-ACK information bit for a CBG is automatically set to ACK without referring to the reception of the associated CB(s) is that, if the UE 102 generates a HARQ-ACK codebook in response to a retransmission of a transport block, corresponding to a same HARQ process as a previous transmission of the transport block, the UE 102 may generate an ACK for each CBG that the UE 102 correctly decoded in a previous transmission of the transport block.
  • DCI format e.g. DCI format 1_0
  • the 5G NR system may be operated licensed spectrum which is owned by cellular operators. Additionally and/or alternatively the 5G NR system may be operated in unlicensed spectrum as a complementary tool for the operators to augment their service offering.
  • NR-based unlicensed access may be applicable to below 6 GHz and above 6GHz unlicensed bands (e.g., 5GHz, 37GHz, 60GHz).
  • NR-U cell may be operated in TDD bands with either an LTE-based anchor cell or an NR-based anchor cell (i.e. standalone NR cell). Furthermore, standalone operation of NR-U in unlicensed spectrum may also be possible.
  • the gNB 160 and/or the UE 102 may have to perform Listen Before Talk (LBT) procedure before their transmissions.
  • LBT procedure is also referred to as Channel Access procedure.
  • CA Channel Access
  • FIG. 16 shows the first type of Channel Access procedure.
  • the first type of Channel Access procedure may be used for downlink transmission(s) including PDSCH and PDCCH.
  • the gNB 160 may transmit a transmission including PDSCH and PDCCH on a carrier on which NR-U cell(s) transmission(s) are performed, after first sensing the channel to be idle during the CA slot durations of a defer duration T d ⁇ and after the counter N is zero in step 4.
  • the counter N is adjusted by sensing the channel for additional CA slot duration(s) according to the Step S1 to step S6.
  • N init N init
  • Step S3 the gNB 160 may sense the channel for an additional CA slot duration, and if the additional CA slot duration is idle, go to Step S4, otherwise go to Step S5.
  • Step S5 the gNB 160 may sense the channel until either a busy CA slot is detected within an additional defer duration T d or all the CA slots of the additional defer duration T d are detected to be idle.
  • Step S6 if the channel is sensed to be idle during all the CA slot durations of the additional defer duration T d , the gNB 160 may go to Step S4, otherwise go to Step S5.
  • Figure 17 shows an example of deferment of transmission. If the gNB 160 has not transmitted a transmission including PDSCH/PDCCH on a carrier on which NR-U cell(s) transmission(s) are performed after Step S4 in this procedure, the gNB 160 may transmit a transmission including PDSCH/PDCCH on the carrier, if the channel is sensed to be idle at least in a CA slot duration T s , when the gNB 160 is ready to transmit PDSCH/PDCCH and if the channel has been sensed to be idle during all the CA slot durations of a defer duration T d immediately before this transmission.
  • the gNB 160 may proceed to Step S1 after sensing the channel to be idle during the CA slot durations of a defer duration T d .
  • a slot duration T sl may be considered to be idle if the gNB 160 senses the channel during the CA slot duration, and the power detected by the gNB 160 for at least 4us within the CA slot duration is less than energy detection threshold xhresh . Otherwise, the CA slot duration T sl may be considered to be busy.
  • CW minp £ CW p £ CJT max p is the contention window.
  • CW p adjustment may be performed by the gNB 160.
  • CW min and CW niax p may be chosen before Step S1 of the above-described procedure.
  • m p , CW min p , and CW max p may be derived based on channel access priority class associated with the gNB transmission.
  • Figure 18 shows an example of channel access priority class for downlink transmission(s).
  • a parameter set for the channel access procedure is defined.
  • the parameter set for class p may include m p , CW minp , , and allowed CW p sizes, where T mcot is referred to as maximum channel occupancy time (MOOT).
  • MOOT maximum channel occupancy time
  • the gNB 160 getting channel access with priority class p may not be allowed to continuously transmit on the carrier on which NR-U cell(s) transmission(s) are performed, for a period exceeding T mcot p .
  • the UE 102 may use the first type of Channel Access procedure for uplink transmission(s) including PUSCH and/or PUCCH.
  • the above-described Channel access procedure including Step S1 to Step S6 may be used with “gNB 160” replaced by “UE102”, with “PDSCH/PDCCH” replaced by “PUSCH/PUCCH/SRS”, and with uplink channel access priority class.
  • Figure 19 shows an example of channel access priority class for uplink transmission(s).
  • the first type of Channel Access procedure is used for uplink transmission, it may also be referred to as Type-1 UL Channel Access procedure.
  • Figure 20 shows the second type of Channel Access procedure.
  • the second type of Channel Access procedure may be used for downlink transmission(s) including discovery signal transmission(s) and not including PDSCH.
  • the discovery signal may include SS/PBCH(s), CSI-RS(s) and/or control resource set(s).
  • the second type of Channel Access procedure may make the channel access easier than the first type, since the discovery signal may not occupy a long transmission duration compared with a PDSCH transmission.
  • the channel is considered to be idle for T drs if it is sensed to be idle during the slot durations of r drs .
  • FIG. 21 shows the third type of Channel Access procedure.
  • Channel sensing scheme of the third type of Channel Access procedure is almost the same as of the second type of Channel Access procedure.
  • the third type of Channel Access procedure may be used for uplink transmission(s) which is to be transmitted inside of COT obtained by the first type channel access procedure at the gNB 160 side.
  • the gNB 160 performs the first type channel access procedure right before a Common Control-PDCCH (CC-PDCCH) transmission.
  • CC-PDCCH may also be referred to as PDCCH with CRC scrambled by common control-RNTI (CC-RNTI).
  • CC-RNTI common control-RNTI
  • a DCI format carried by the CC-PDCCH may include several bit fields including bit field(s) for indicating“UL offset” and“UL duration”.
  • the UE 102 is not required to receive any downlink physical channels and/or physical signals in slot(s) rfrfr-i with F0, 1 , .., d ⁇ ⁇ , and those slot(s) may have to be covered by the MCOT which was obtained by the channel access for the CC-PDCCH transmission at gNB 160 side. If the UE uses Type 2 channel access procedure for a transmission including PUSCH, the UE may be allowed to transmit the transmission including PUSCH immediately after sensing the channel to be idle for at least a sensing interval
  • ⁇ short ui 25 ⁇ 5 ⁇ .
  • the channel is considered to be idle for r short ul if it is sensed to be idle during the CA slot durations of T short ul .
  • the first type of Channel Access procedure may also be referred to as Type-2 UL Channel Access procedure.
  • the other type of PDCCH e.g. PDCCH with DCI format 0_0, 0J , 0 . 2, 0 . 3, 1 . 0, 1 . 1 , 1.2, 1.3
  • slot n may also indicate“UL offset” and“UL duration”.
  • the UE may also be allowed to use the third type of Channel Access procedure, if configured.
  • Figure 22 shows the fourth type of Channel Access procedure.
  • Channel sensing scheme of the fourth type of Channel Access procedure is almost the same as of the second and third types of Channel Access procedure.
  • the fourth type of Channel Access procedure may be used for downlink transmission(s) which includes PUSCH but does not include PDSCH and is to be transmitted inside of COT obtained by the first type channel access procedure at the UE 102 side.
  • the channel is considered to be idle for r pdcch if it is sensed to be idle during the slot durations of T pdcch '
  • contention window (CW) size may change depending on how many times collisions occur or equivalent. If a collision is observed at a node, the node may have to increase the CW size. If any collision is not observed, the node may be allowed to reduce the CW size.
  • Figure 23 shows an example of CW size adjustment. This example assumes that the number of available CW size is 7, i.e. CW#0 to CW#6. If a collision is observed, CW size is increased to the CW size with the next higher index, except for the CW max in which case the CW size is kept as CW max . If any collision is not observed, the CW size may fallback to CW min irrespective of the previous CW size.
  • a possible metric for the gNB’ s decision on whether or not the collision occurs for PDSCH may be HARQ-ACK feedback from the UE 102.
  • Another possible metric for the gNB’ s decision on whether or not the collision occurs in PDCCH may be PUSCH from the UE 102.
  • a possible metric for the UE’ s decision on whether or not the collision occurs for PUSCH may be whether or not uplink retransmission is requested.
  • FIG 40 shows an example of LBT for a transmission with a directional beam.
  • the gNB 160 may perform transmission beam sweeping with multiple narrow Tx beams (e.g. Tx beam#1 , #2 and #3). Immediately before a signal transmission with any Tx beam, the gNB 160 may have to perform LBT. In this example, the gNB 160 performs channel sensing by using a wider beam (Rx beam #0) in horizontal plane (e.g. omni-directional Rx beam).
  • the LBT parameters (counter, CWS, channel access class, COT, and so on) may be managed per node. For example, counter and CWS may be managed per node. In this case, once the counter reaches zero, the gNB 160 may be allowed to perform transmission with any of the Tx beams, and a single CWS is maintained with referring to collisions (e.g. NACKs) on all of the Tx beams.
  • some linkage from Tx beam used for a transmission to Rx beam used for channel sensing for the transmission, or vice versa may be defined.
  • each of the Tx beam #1 , #2 and #3 corresponds to the Rx beam #0.
  • the LBT parameters may be managed per Rx beam.
  • counter and CWS may be managed per node. Once the counter for a given Rx beam reaches zero, the gNB 160 may be allowed to perform transmission with any of the Tx beams which are linked to the given Rx beam, and a single CWS for the given Rx beam is maintained with referring to collisions on all of the Tx beams which are linked to the given Rx beam.
  • COT may be figured per Rx beam.
  • the gNB 160 may be allowed, subject to Cat-1 or Cat-2 LBT, to perform transmissions using any of the Tx beams which correspond to the given Rx beam.
  • either the counter or the CWS may be managed per Rx beam while the other one may be managed per node.
  • the counter is managed per Rx beam, and once the counter reaches zero, the gNB 160 may be allowed to perform a transmission with any of the Tx beams which are linked to the Rx beam.
  • collisions on all of Tx beams (including Tx beam #1 , #2 and #3 and any other beams of the gNB160) may be considered for CWS adjustment for the Rx beam #0.
  • Cat-1 LBT is a channel access procedure without channel sensing.
  • Cat ⁇ 2 LBT is a channel access procedure with one shot channel sensing.
  • Cat-2 LBT may also be referred to as Type-2 channel access procedure.
  • Cat-1 and Cat-2 LBTs may be allowed only inside COT.
  • Cat-3 LBT is a channel access procedure with random backoff with a fixed CW side.
  • Cat-4 LBT is a channel access procedure with random backoff with an adaptive CW side.
  • Cat-4 LBT may also be referred to as Type-1 channel access procedure.
  • Tx beams may correspond to some physical channels or physical signals.
  • each Tx beam may correspond to a respective source of quasi-co-location (QCL) assumption.
  • the sources of QCL assumption may include SS/PBCH, CSI-RS, PT-RS, NR-U discovery signal/channel which may comprise SS/PBCH, and the like. Therefore, it is noted that the above-described“Tx beam” can be interpreted as the corresponding physical channel or physical signal.
  • the Tx beam may correspond to some transmission antenna configuration, e.g. a weight vector for a transmission antenna array. In this case, the above-described “Tx beam” can be interpreted as the corresponding antenna configuration.
  • the Rx beam may correspond to some reception antenna configuration, e.g. a weight vector for a reception antenna array. In this case, the above-described“Rx beam” can be interpreted as the corresponding antenna configuration.
  • threshold for the channel sensing may need to be adjusted.
  • the antenna gain ratio between Rx antenna configuration and Tx antenna configuration for a given direction e.g. the direction to the target UE, the center direction of the Tx beam main lobe, the direction of the peak of the Tx beam main lobe
  • the antenna gain ratio between Rx antenna configuration and Tx antenna configuration for a given direction e.g. the direction to the target UE, the center direction of the Tx beam main lobe, the direction of the peak of the Tx beam main lobe
  • the threshold value for the channel sensing using the Rx beam #0 may be decreased with 18 dB, compared with a non-directional transmission case.
  • FIG 41 shows an example of LBT for a transmission with a directional beam.
  • the gNB 160 may be able to use multiple narrow Tx beams (e.g. Tx beam#1 , #2 and #3) for transmissions as well as multiple narrow Rx beams (e.g. Rx beam#1 , #2 and #3) for receptions.
  • the gNB 160 may have to perform LBT.
  • Some linkage e.g. 1— to— 1 mapping
  • Tx beam #1 , #2 and #3 correspond to the Rx beam #1 , #2 and #3, respectively.
  • LBT may have to be performed by using the Rx beam which is linked from the given Tx beam.
  • the gNB 160 may be allowed to perform a transmission with the Tx beam which is linked to the given Rx beam.
  • LBT parameters may be managed per Tx beam.
  • COT may be figured per Tx beam. Within the COT for a given Tx beam, the gNB 160 may be allowed, subject to Cat-1 or Cat-2 LBT, to perform transmissions using the given Tx beam. Additionally, some of the LBT parameters may be managed per node.
  • a single counter may be generated and updated for each Tx beam, while a single CWS per node may be adjusted by considering collisions on all of the Tx beams.
  • the COT may be figured per node. Within the COT, the gNB 160 may be allowed, subject to Cat-1 or Cat-2 LBT, to perform transmissions using any of the Tx beams.
  • a NR band may include one or more NR carriers (also referred to as just carrier).
  • a carrier may include one or more BWPs.
  • BWP#0 also referred to as initial BWP or initial DL BWP, which may be configured by Master Information Block (MIB), System Information Block type 1 (SIB 1 ), or equivalent for PCell
  • MIB Master Information Block
  • SIB 1 System Information Block type 1
  • the other BWPs may have bandwidth of multiple of 20 MHz.
  • Each sub-band may comprise 20 MHz or a multiple of 20 MHz bandwidth and is defined within a BWP.
  • BWP#0 may consist of a single 20MHz sub-band. Any other BWP may consist of one or more sub-bands.
  • the sub-band may be a unit of frequency scheduling.
  • the sub-band may also referred to as sub-channel, channel access bandwidth, or the like.
  • a higher layer configuration about a BWP may include a configurations of sub-band(s) in the BWP.
  • the sub-band(s) may be configured by using frequency domain resource allocations in CORESET configurations.
  • the sub-band may be an upper limit of the resources which is schedulable by a single DCI. In other words, PDSCH/PUSCH resource allocation is defined within a sub-band and not across a sub-band boundary.
  • the sub-band may be a unit of LBT.
  • the sub-band may be a unit of CORESET configuration. CORESET frequency resource allocation is defined within a sub-band and not across a sub-band boundary.
  • CORESET configuration may contains information for indicating frequency repetition of the CORESET. For example, if CORESET configuration contains an information element for frequency repetition, the frequency repetition of the CORESET may be considered to be enabled if CORESET configuration does not contain the information element for frequency repetition, the frequency repetition of the CORESET may be considered to be disabled.
  • the information element for frequency repetition may include one or more of 1) frequency domain repetition factor (i.e. the number of frequency domain repetitions), 2) frequency domain interval between adjacent repetitions, etc. If UE 102 is configured with the repetition enabled, the UE 102 may assume the same set of PDCCHs are transmitted among those repeated CORESETs.
  • PDCCH in a CORESET in a given sub-band may be able to schedule a PDSCH only in the same sub-band.
  • DCI format(s) used for the scheduling of PDSCH/PUSCH in a NR-U cell may include a frequency domain resource assignment field -
  • the gNB 160 may perform channel sensing in every sub-band and may transmit a signal (PDCCH, PDSCH, etc) in the sub-band(s) on which the gNB 160 gets a channel access successfully.
  • the UE 102 may be able to monitor PDCCHs in multiple CORESET which correspond to different sub-bands.
  • the gNB 160 may manage the LBT parameters per sub-band, alternatively per BWP, or yet alternatively per cell. Additionally and/or alternatively some of the LBT parameters may be managed per sub-band, which the others may be managed differently (e.g. per BWP or per cell).
  • the UE 102 may perform channel sensing in every sub-band and may transmit a signal (PUCCH, PUSCH, etc) in the sub-band(s) on which the UE 102 gets a channel access successfully.
  • the gNB 1 60 may be able to monitor the signal in every sub-bands.
  • the UE 102 may manage the LBT parameters per sub-band, alternatively per BWP, or yet alternatively per cell. Additionally and/or alternatively some of the LBT parameters may be managed per sub-band, which the others may be managed differently (e.g. per BWP or per cell).
  • PDCCH in each sub-band may be able to schedule a PDSCH in the whole bandwidth of the BWP.
  • DCI format(s) used for the scheduling of PDSCH/PUSCH in a NR-U cell may include a frequency domain resource assignment field -
  • the gNB 160 may prepare a PDSCH/PUSCH assuming that the whole bandwidth of the BWP is available for the PDSCH/PUSCH transmission.
  • the gNB 160 may perform channel sensing in every sub-band and may transmit the prepared PDSCH only on the sub-band(s) where the LBT was successful.
  • the PDSCH resources e.g. REs or RBs
  • the PDSCH resources may have to be punctured (i.e. the PDSCH is not mapped to the physical resources) so that the PDSCH transmission does not happen in those sub-band(s).
  • PDCCH which schedules the PDSCH multiples PDCCHs scheduling the same PDSCH may be prepared. These PDCCHs may be assumed to be mapped in different sub-bands in the BWP.
  • the PDCCH(s) in the sub-band(s) on which the gNB 160 gets a channel access successfully may be transmitted, while The PDCCH(s) in the sub-band(s) on which the gNB 160 does not get a channel access successfully may not be transmitted.
  • the UE 102 may detect more than one PDCCHs that schedule the same PDSCH. Scheduling the same PDSCH may mean the DCIs in the PDCCH have the same value in every information field and CRC. Alternatively, it may mean the DCIs in the PDCCH indicate the same PDSCH parameter set, e.g. allocated resources, counter DAI, PUCCH resource, etc. Yet alternatively, it may mean those PDCCHs are repeated among the repeated CORESETs (i.e. CORESETS with the frequency domain repetition).
  • the UE 102 may detect more than one PDCCHs that schedule the same PDSCH, the UE may have to discard the PDCCHs except for one of them. In other words, only one PDCCH is considered to be valid, while all the other detected PDCCHs are considered to be invalid. Alternatively, the UE 102 may consider those multiple detected PDCCHs as a single detected PDCCH, and the duplicated indications of the multiple detected PDCCHs may apply only once.
  • the above-described principle may apply to the other type of DCI (e.g. DCI format 0_0, 0_1 , 2_0, 2_1 , 2_2, 2_3) than the one scheduling PDSCH.
  • the gNB 1 60 may transmit multiple PDCCHs with DCI format 2_2 in the multiple sub-bands in the BWP. If the UE 102 detects the multiple PDCCHs with DCI format
  • the TPC command of only one of the PDCCHs with the DCI format 2_2 may apply and the TPC command(s) of the other PDCCHs may not apply.
  • the frequency domain resource assignment field in the DCI in the PDCCH may indicate allocated resources (e.g. resource blocks) comprise the resources on the sub-band(s) to which the gNB 160 does not actually map the PDSCH due to a channel access failure. Without any supplementary information, the UE 102 detecting the DCI may assume that the PDSCH is mapped to the resources in those sub-band(s).
  • the UE 102 may utilize some supplementary information so that the UE 102 can perform PDSCH decoding assuming that the PDSCH is not mapped to the resource in those sub-band(s).
  • the supplementary information may be results of PDCCH detections in the sub-bands. Additionally and/or alternatively, the supplementary information may be information provided by CC-PDCCH or SFI PDCCH. Additionally and/or alternatively, the supplementary information may be information provided by DCI format 2_1 (also referred to as pre-emption indication).
  • the UE 102 may perform PDSCH decoding assuming that the PDSCH is not mapped to the resource in those sub-band(s). More specifically, for example, the UE 102 configured with the repetition of the CORESET, the UE 102 may assume multiple PDCCHs scheduling a single PDSCH are transmitted in all repetitions of the CORESET. If the UE 102 does not detect the PDCCH in a given sub-band, the UE 102 may assume that the scheduled PDSCH resources in the sub-band are not available for the PDSCH transmission and that the PDSCH is punctured (i.e. prepared to be mapped but not actually mapped) on those PDSCH resources. On the other hand, if the UE 102 detects the PDCCH in a given sub-band, the UE 102 may assume the scheduled PDSCH resources in the sub-band are available for the PDSCH transmission.
  • the UE 102 may perform PDSCH decoding assuming that the PDSCH is not mapped to the resource in those sub-band(s).
  • SFI PDCCH e.g. PDCCH with DCI format 2_0 or PDCCH with DCI format which indicates slot format(s)
  • a reference subcarrier spacing configuration may be configured by higher layer parameter.
  • Each SFI PDCCH may indicate a slot format and/or COT structure in the respective sub-band where the SFI PDCCH is mapped.
  • the slot format may include one or more of 1 ) a slot configuration period of P, 2) the number of slots ⁇ slols with only downlink symbols, 3) the number of downlink symbols ⁇ sym , 4) the number of slots “ slots with only uplink symbols, 5) the number of uplink symbols Msym .
  • the usy TM symbols before the last Mslots slots are uplink symbols.
  • the slot configuration period P may be assumed to be a remaining COT duration.
  • the slot format may include multiple sets of a combination among the above 1 ) to 5). In this case, the total length of the multiple slot configuration periods may be assumed to be a remaining COT duration.
  • the slot format may include one or more of 1 ) the number of downlink symbols ⁇ sym , 2) the number of flexible symbols 4 m , 3) the number of uplink symbols Msym . From the first symbol on which the SFI PDCCH is mapped, a first ⁇ sym symbols are downlink symbols. The next m symbols are flexible symbols, followed by Msym uplink symbols.
  • the slot configuration period P may be equal to c sym + 4 m + 1 ⁇ 2 ym - The slot configuration period P may be assumed to be a remaining COT duration starting with the first symbol on which the SFI PDCCH is mapped.
  • the slot format may include multiple sets of a combination among the above 1 ) to 3).
  • the n-th set of ⁇ sym downlink symbols may start with the next symbol of the n— 1 -th set of the Usym uplink symbols.
  • the total length of the multiple slot configuration periods may be assumed to be a remaining COT duration.
  • the SFI PDCCH may have the first bit field (e.g. a 9-bit field) to indicate the index of the entry of which the corresponding slot format configuration is applied.
  • the second bit field may also be included in the SFI PDCCH.
  • the second bit field may indicate the start of the remaining COT within the COT structure which is indicated by the first bit field.
  • the slot format configuration indicated by the first bit field may contain N sets of combinations of 1 ) the number of downlink symbols 2) the number of flexible symbols f sym , 3) the number of uplink symbols
  • bit field may indicate one of three states, each of the states corresponds to the first downlink symbol of the respective combination of 1 ), 2) and 3).
  • the indicated symbol may be considered as a starting symbol of the remaining COT, and/or the indicated symbol may be considered to be the first symbol of the symbol set where the detected SFI PDCCH is mapped.
  • the gNB 160 may transmit the SFI PDCCH at the beginning of every slot.
  • the gNB may transmit multiple SFI PDCCHs of which first bit fields indicate the same slot format configuration, while second bit fields indicate different values.
  • the value of each of the second bit fields may correspond to the respective SFI PDCCH location within the indicated slot format.
  • the slot format indications / configurations may also be able to indicate Unoccupied symbol(s).
  • the slot format may also include the number of Unoccupied symbols o sym . Only one o sym value may be contained in a SFI PDCCH, irrespective of the number of sets of DL/Flexible/UL symbols.
  • the indicated unoccupied symbols may be concatenated with the indicated DL/Flexible/UL symbols at the end, where the remaining COT does not include those unoccupied symbols.
  • the gNB 160 may set the symbols outside COT with Unoccupied.
  • the UE 102 may assume the unoccupied symbol(s) is not covered by the DL COT, and may not be allowed to use Cat-1 or Cat-2 LBT for a UL transmission on those unoccupied symbol(s). Unoccupied may be also referred to as
  • the UE 102 may assume the remaining part (i.e. the part on and after the symbol where the physical signal is mapped) of the slot is filled with downlink symbol(s). The symbols prior to the symbol where the physical signal is mapped may be assumed to be filled with unoccupied symbol(s). If the UE 102 does not detect the physical signal in a given slot at all, the UE 102 may assume that all symbols in the slot are filled with unoccupied symbols.
  • some physical signal e.g. a known physical signal described below
  • the PDCCHs in different sub-bands may contain different slot format field values, while downlink portions may have to be aligned among the slot formats in the PDCCHs, and also uplink portions may have to be aligned among the slot formats in the PDCCHs.
  • COT e.g. start timing of the COT, duration of the COT, end timing of the COT, or any combination of them
  • DL/Flexible/UL configurations within the COTs are aligned among sub-bands.
  • SFI PDCCH may be transmitted in one sub-band in a BWP, where the sub-band may need to be one of the sub-band(s) in which the gNB 160 gets channel access successfully.
  • the UE 102 may monitor SFI PDCCH in all or some of the sub-bands.
  • the SFI PDCCH may contain the first bit field which indicate a slot format, where the aforementioned slot format indications and/or configurations may be applicable.
  • the SFI PDCCH may also contain the second bit field which indicates channel occupancy status of all the sub-bands in the BWP.
  • a simple option to indicate channel occupancy status of all the sub-bands may be a bitmap based indication.
  • the size of the second bit field may be equal to the number of the sub-bands, and each bit corresponds to the respective sub-band. If the gNB 160 gets Cat-4 based channel access successfully in a given sub-band and the SFI PDCCH is transmitted inside the DL COT based on that channel access, the value of the bit corresponding to the given sub-band may be set to one. If the gNB 160 does not get Cat-4 based channel access successfully in a given sub-band or the SFI PDCCH is transmitted outside the DL COT, the value of the bit corresponding to the given sub-band may be set to zero. The values, i.e. one and zero, can be reversed.
  • the slot format indicated by the first bit field may be applicable to only the sub-band(s) which is indicated by the second bit field as inside the DL COT.
  • the slot format indicated by the first bit field may be not applicable to the sub-band(s) which is indicated by the second bit field as outside the DL COT.
  • the resources in the sub-band(s) which is indicated by the second bit field as outside the DL COT may be considered as unoccupied, irrespective of the indicated slot format.
  • SFI PDCCH may be transmitted in one sub-band in a BWP, where the sub-band may need to be one of the sub-band(s) in which the gNB 160 gets channel access successfully.
  • the UE 102 may monitor SFI PDCCH in all or some of the sub-bands and may detect the one which is actually transmitted by the gNB 160.
  • CC-PDCCH which indicates COT duration may be transmitted in every sub-band in the BWP.
  • the UE 102 may obtain the slot format based on the SFI PDCCH.
  • the UE 102 may obtain whether each sub-band is occupied (i.e.
  • the slot format indicated by the SFI PDCCH may be applicable only to the sub-bands which are indicated by the CC-PDCCHs as occupied.
  • the resources in the sub-band(s) which is indicated by the CC-PDCCH as outside the DL COT may be considered as unoccupied, irrespective of the indicated slot format by the SFI PDCCH.
  • the UE 102 may perform PDSCH decoding assuming that the PDSCH is not mapped to the resource in those sub-band(s). For example, the gNB 160 schedules PDSCH in a slot, and the scheduling PDCCH indicates frequency domain resources for PDSCH are mapped to resources in one or more sub-bands. However, some of the sub-bands is actually not available for the PDSCH transmission, because of the LBT failure. In this case, the gNB 160 may transmit a pre-emption indication in the next or later slot. The pre-emption indication indicates the PDSCH transmission in the sub-band was interrupted (punctured).
  • the UE 102 may decode the PDSCH assuming that there was no PDSCH transmission in the sub-band but the PDSCH was transmitted only using the other sub-band(s). In this case, granularity of possibly interrupted resources may be a sub-band or multiple of sub-band. To be more specific, if a UE detects a DCI format 2_1 for a serving cell from the configured set of serving cells, the UE may assume that no transmission to the UE is present in PRBs and in symbols that are indicated by the DCI format 2_1 , from a set of PRBs and a set of symbols of the last monitoring period.
  • the indication by the DCI format 2_1 is not applicable to receptions of SS/PBCH blocks.
  • An indication granularity for time-frequency resources may be configured by higher layer parameter.
  • the set of PRBs may be set to be equal to the bandwidth of a sub-band.
  • Figure 43 shows an example of PDCCH monitoring occasions. At the beginning part of a transmission burst, a known physical signal may be transmitted. If UE 102 detects the known signal in a slot, the UE 102 may start monitoring of PDCCH in the same or the next slot.
  • the known signal may be referred to as a triggering signal.
  • possible locations of triggering signal may also be configured by higher layer signaling.
  • Each of the possible locations may be tied to a respective PDCCH monitoring occasion.
  • the UE 102 may monitor PDCCH in the PDCCH monitoring occasion which is derived from the location of the detected triggering signal in the slot. If the UE 102 is configured with search space set(s) each having a periodicity longer than or equal to one slot, the UE 102 is not expected to monitor the other PDCCH monitoring occasions in the same slot. In the next and later slots, the UE 102 may follow search space configuration to determine PDCCH monitoring occasions.
  • Possible signal structure of the triggering signal may be PSS/SSS, CSI-RS, PT-RS, wideband DMRS for PDCCH, or Wi-Fi preamble-like preamble.
  • the triggering signal may not be exactly the same as regular PSS/SSS in order to be differentiated from regular PSS/SSS.
  • the first option is to use a dedicated sequence(s) which is not allowed to be used for regular PSS/SSS in NR-U band.
  • the relative location between PSS and SSS is different from the one of regular PSS/SSS, e.g. the locations of PSS and SSS may be swapped.
  • PSS and SSS may be located in adjacent OFDM symbols with a same frequency location or in a same OFDM symbol with different frequency locations.
  • the center frequency of the triggering signal may not be aligned to a frequency raster (i.e. multiple of 100 kHz).
  • PDSCH mapping When considering an initial partial slot, there may be two aspects. One is PDSCH mapping, while the other is PDCCH monitoring interval. Four options may be identified as possible candidates for PDSCH transmission in the partial slot at least for the first PDSCH(s) transmitted in the DL transmission burst. Option 1 is to use PDSCH(s) as in Rel— 15 NR. Option 2 is punctured PDSCH depending on LBT outcome. Option 3 is PDSCH mapping type B with durations other than 2/4/7 symbols. Option 4 is PDSCH across slot boundary.
  • Case A and Case B are examples of Option 1.
  • an initial partial slot is filled out with several sets of a scheduling PDCCH and the scheduled PDSCH.
  • PDCCHs are transmitted in several PDCCH monitoring occasions within the initial partial slot, and each of the PDCCHs uses PDSCH mapping type B for scheduling of a respective PDSCH.
  • the behavior is the same as Case 2 PDCCH monitoring capability.
  • the first PDCCH generation has to be after the successful LBT, while the gNB 160 can start to prepare a transport block for the first PDSCH before getting the channel access.
  • the time duration of the second PDSCH needs to be adjusted depending on the timing of the successful LBT. Therefore, the processing for the second PDSCH and the corresponding PDCCH has to be after the channel access.
  • Case 2 PDCCH monitoring capability is a UE feature which supports
  • the duration is between the first OFDM symbol of the slot and the last OFDM symbol of the scheduled PDSCH resources in the slot.
  • the duration is the number of OFDM symbols of the scheduled PDSCH resources as signalled.
  • the PDSCH duration is either 2, 4, or 7 OFDM symbols for normal cyclic prefix or either 2, 4, 6 OFDM symbols for extended cyclic prefix.
  • Case B The difference of Case B from Case A is the number of PDCCH monitoring occasions within the initial partial slot. That of Case B is only one, in which several PDCCHs are transmitted. From the UE perspective, PDCCH monitoring processing requirement is not as much as Case A, because of less monitoring occasions within the initial partial slot. However, Case B may require a bit more processing ability to the gNB 160 side compared with Case A, because the gNB 160 needs to finish the scheduling of the second PDSCH before the first PDCCH transmission.
  • Case C is related to Option 2 and 3.
  • an initial partial slot is filled out with a single scheduling PDCCH and a single scheduled PDSCH.
  • the gNB 160 starts PDSCH preparation prior to getting the channel, and right after the successful LBT the gNB generates PDCCH and transmits it followed by the PDSCH.
  • the duration of the actual transmitted PDSCH is shorter than the assumed duration for the preparation. Therefore, puncturing or rate-matching needs to be applied to the PDSCH.
  • Some information related to the modified duration e.g. duration other than 2/4/7 symbols
  • the Time domain resource assignment field value m of the DCI provides a row index m + 1.
  • the indexed row defines the slot offset K0, the start and length indicator SLIV, or directly the start symbol S and the allocation length L, and the PDSCH mapping type to be assumed in the PDSCH reception.
  • the slot allocated for the PDSCH is where n is the slot with the scheduling DCI, and K 0 is based on the numerology of PDSCH, and ⁇ PDSCH and are the subcarrier spacing configurations for PDSCH and PDCCH, respectively.
  • se SLIV 14 ⁇ (14 - L + 1) + (14 - 1 - 5) where 0 ⁇ Z ⁇ 14-S
  • Transport block size may be determined based on the S and L.
  • the slot allocated for the PDSCH may be derived in the above method.
  • Time domain resource allocation is determined by S and L.
  • X may be signaled by the same PDCCH.
  • X is an offset between a PDCCH monitoring occasion and actually received PDCCH location in the slot.
  • Case D is related to Option 2.
  • the difference of Case D from Case C is PDCCH contents.
  • the gNB 160 prepares the PDCCH prior to getting the channel. Therefore, the DCI cannot indicate the accurate time domain resource allocation.
  • the duration could be tied to the time domain location of the PDCCH which is actually transmitted. From the UE point of view, processing requirement for Case D is almost the same as for Case B.
  • Case D even though the gNB 160 does not update PDCCH contents based on when the gNB gets the channel access successfully, actual time domain allocation of the PDSCH may be different from the assumption of the PDSCH preparation which affects the PDCCH contents. Therefore, UE 102 may interpret the PDCCH contents in a different way from the case when the UE 102 receives the PDCCH in a higher-layer configured PDCCH monitoring occasions.
  • the Time domain resource assignment field value m of the DCI provides a row index m + 1.
  • the indexed row defines the slot offset K0, the start and length indicator SLIV, or directly the start symbol S and the allocation length L, and the PDSCH mapping type to be assumed in the PDSCH reception.
  • the slot allocated for the PDSCH is where n is the slot with the scheduling DCI, and K 0 is based on the numerology of PDSCH, and ⁇ PDSCH and -“PDCCH are the subcarrier spacing configurations for PDSCH and PDCCH, respectively.
  • the starting symbol S relative to the start of the slot, and the number of consecutive symbols L counting from the symbol S allocated for the PDSCH are determined from the start and length indicator SLIV: if ( ⁇ -! - ? then
  • SLIV ⁇ - (L- ⁇ ) + S e
  • se ffl/ r 14. (14- I + l) + C14-l -S) where 0 ⁇ Z ⁇ 14-S . Jhe S denotes an index of the starting symbol of PDSCH time domain resource allocation, and the L denotes the length of PDSCH time domain resource allocation.
  • the PDSCH mapping type is set to Type A or Type B.
  • the slot allocated for the PDSCH may be derived in the above method.
  • the starting symbol S’ may be set to S + X, where X is an offset between a PDCCH monitoring occasion and actually received PDCCH location in the slot.
  • the duration may be set to min(L, min(S’ + L, 14) - S’ ) for normal CP and min(L, min(S’ + L, 12) - S’ ) for extended CP, so that the end point of the PDSCH time domain allocation does not exceed the end boundary of the slot.
  • Transport block size may be determined based on the time domain resource allocation assuming the S and L.
  • Case E is similar to Case C in terms of PDCCH and PDSCH processing.
  • the PDSCH for the initial slot is shifted and is mapped across the slot boundary to the next slot. Therefore, Case E is related to Option 4.
  • the duration of the actual transmitted PDSCH is the same as the assumed duration for the preparation.
  • the gNB 160 may adjust the duration of a PDSCH in the next slot based on the timing of the LBT in the initial partial slot so that the end of the PDSCH in the next slot is aligned to the next slot boundary.
  • Case F is also related to Option 4.
  • the difference of Case F from Case E is PDCCH contents.
  • the gNB 160 prepares the PDCCH prior to getting the channel as in Case D. Therefore, the DCI cannot indicate the accurate time domain resource allocation.
  • the actual time domain resource allocation could be tied to the time domain location of the PDCCH which schedules the concerned PDSCH. From the UE 102 point of view, processing requirement for Case F is almost the same as for Case B.
  • Case F even though the gNB 160 does not update PDCCH contents based on when the gNB gets the channel access successfully, actual time domain allocation of the PDSCH may be different from the assumption of the PDSCH preparation which affects the PDCCH contents. Therefore, UE 102 may interpret the PDCCH contents in a different way from the case when the UE 102 receives the PDCCH in a higher-layer configured PDCCH monitoring occasions.
  • the Time domain resource assignment field value m of the DCI provides a row index m + 1.
  • the indexed row defines the slot offset K0, the start and length indicator SLIV, or directly the start symbol S and the allocation length L, and the PDSCH mapping type to be assumed in the PDSCH reception.
  • the slot allocated for the PDSCH is where n is the slot with the scheduling DCI, and K 0 is based on the numerology of PDSCH, and '“PDSCH and ⁇ PD CCH are the subcarrier spacing configurations for PDSCH and PDCCH, respectively.
  • the starting symbol S relative to the start of the slot, and the number of consecutive symbols L counting from the symbol S allocated for the PDSCH are determined from the start and length indicator SLIV: if then
  • the PDSCH mapping type is set to Type A or Type B.
  • the slot allocated for the PDSCH may be derived in the above method.
  • the starting symbol S’ may be set to S + X, where X is an offset between a PDCCH monitoring occasion and actually received PDCCH location in the slot.
  • the duration may be set to L.
  • Transport block size may be determined based on the time domain resource allocation assuming the S and L.
  • Figure 44 shows an example of triggering signal and CORESET resource allocation.
  • the UE 102 may monitor PDCCH in the CORESET which is multiplexed with the triggering signal in frequency domain.
  • the PDCCH monitoring occasion is derived from the time domain location of the detected triggering signal.
  • Figure 45 shows an example of triggering signal and CORESET resource allocation.
  • the triggering signal and the corresponding CORESET are multiplexed in time domain.
  • the PDCCH monitoring occasion is derived from the time domain location of the detected triggering signal.
  • the PDCCH monitoring occasion may be derived from the time domain location of the detected triggering signal and a relation between CORESET frequency resource allocation and the frequency location of the triggering signal. More specifically, if configured CORESET resource overlaps the triggering signal in frequency domain, the PDCCH monitoring occasion is right after the triggering signal location in time domain. If configured CORESET resource does not overlap the triggering signal in frequency domain, the PDCCH monitoring occasion starts on the same symbol as the triggering signal location in time domain.
  • SFI using DCI format 2_0 also referred to as SFI PDCCH
  • CC-PDCCH common control-PDCCH
  • the SFI for NR-U may support only up to one DL-to-UL switching point.
  • FIG. 30 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling.
  • a RRC message e.g. a dedicated RRC message, a common RRC message, or a broadcasted RRC message
  • the RRC message may also contain an information element for configurating a set of one or more (e.g. N) slot format combination configuration(s), which is referred to as SFI combination(s) or as slotFormatCombinations.
  • Each of the slot format combination configuration(s) may include a slot format combination and a slot format combination ID.
  • Each of the SFI combination set(s) may apply to a respective cell or to a respective LBT sub-band.
  • the configuration of each of the SFI combination set(s) may include a serving cell ID (or LBT sub-band ID) which is the ID of the serving cell for which the slotFormatCombinations are applicable, subcarrier spacing which is a reference subcarrier spacing for this Slot Format Combination, one or more (e.g. N, an integer whose value is up to 512) slot format combination ID(s), a position in DCI for specifying the (starting) position (bit) of the slotFormatCombinationld (SFI -Index) for this serving cell (servingCellld) within the DCI payload.
  • the number of slot formats indicated by a respective entry may be same or different from the one of another entry.
  • the DCI format carried by the GC-PDCCH may contain a bit field (also referred to as an SFHndex field) for indicate one entry out of the configured slot format combination(s).
  • the bit field size may be determined by using the number of the configured slot format combination(s).
  • the SFHndex field value in the DCI format indicates to a UE a slot format for each slot in a number of slots for each DL BWP or each UL BWP starting from a slot where the UE detects the DCI format.
  • the number of slots may be equal to or larger than a PDCCH monitoring periodicity for DCI format carrying the SFI.
  • the number of slots may be allowed to be smaller than a PDCCH monitoring periodicity for DCI format carrying the SFI.
  • the SFHndex field includes max ⁇ [log 2 (maxSFIindex + l)],l ⁇ bits where maxSFIindex is the maximum value of the values provided by corresponding slotFormatCombinationld.
  • a slot format is identified by a corresponding format index as provided in Table 1 where ⁇ ’ denotes a downlink symbol,’Ll’ denotes an uplink symbol, and 'F' denotes a flexible symbol.
  • the SFHndex field set to n may indicate slot formats of the M n slots starting with the slot where the UE 102 detects the DCI format, and each slot format included in the slot format combination with the slot format combination ID equal to n corresponds to a respective slot within the M n slots.
  • the slot formats in Table 1 may be applicable to NR-U serving cells as well as non NR-U serving cells.
  • Table 1 Slot formats.
  • GC-PDCCH carrying SFI may be applicable to a BWP comprising of more than one LBT sub-bands, where an operation of a BWP having more than one LBT sub-bands may be also referred to as a wideband operation.
  • FIG. 31 shows a dynamic SFI signaling for a wideband operation.
  • LBT may be performed per LBT sub-band.
  • the gNB 160 may transmit GC-PDCCH at the beginning part of the transmission initiated by the LBT.
  • the GC-PDCCH may carry the DCI format for indicating slot format(s) of the LBT sub-band where the GC-PDCCH is detected.
  • This kind of GC-PDCCH may be referred to as aperiodic GC-PDCCH hereafter.
  • the beginning part can be a part including the starting symbol of the transmission but does not necessarily always mean it.
  • the beginning part can be a location relatively close to the beginning within the transmission, and there may be one or a few symbols and/or a fractional symbol between the beginning of the transmission and the starting symbol of the symbol(s) carrying the GC-PDCCH.
  • the slot where the UE 102 detects the GC-PDCCH in a given LBT sub-band may or may not be different from the slot where the UE 102 detects the GC-PDCCH in another LBT sub-band. Even if they are detected in a same slot, the symbol(s) where the UE 102 detects the GC-PDCCH in the given LBT sub-band may or may not be different from the symbol(s) where the UE 102 detects the GC-PDCCH in the other LBT sub-band.
  • the UE 102 may not expect that the symbol which is indicated as DL by GC-PDCCH in a given LBT sub-band is indicated as UL by another GC-PDCCH in another LBT sub-band in a same BWP.
  • the UE 102 may not expect that the symbol which is indicated as UL by GC-PDCCH in a given LBT sub-band is indicated as DL by another GC-PDCCH in another LBT sub-band in a same BWP.
  • the restriction of the alignment between LBT sub-bands may be different between DL and UL.
  • the symbol which is indicated as DL by GC-PDCCH in a given LBT sub-band may be able to be indicated as either DL or Flexible by another GC-PDCCH in another LBT sub-band in a same BWP, while the UE 102 may not expect that the symbol which is indicated as UL by GC-PDCCH in a given LBT sub-band is indicated as either DL or Flexible by another GC-PDCCH in another LBT sub-band in a same BWP.
  • the UE 102 which is capable for PDCCH receptions and/or PDSCH receptions in initial partial slots may have to monitor GC-PDCCH with a periodicity shorter than a slot length (e.g. 1 ms for 15kHz sub-carrier spacing, 0.5ms for 30kHz sub-carrier spacing).
  • a periodicity shorter than a slot length (e.g. 1 ms for 15kHz sub-carrier spacing, 0.5ms for 30kHz sub-carrier spacing).
  • GC-PDCCH monitoring occasions may start at every 2 OFDM symbol, though minimum interval of normal PDCCH monitoring occasions may be 1 OFDM symbol (i.e. the normal PDCCH monitoring occasions may be able to start at every OFDM symbol).
  • a given GC-PDCCH monitoring occasion consists of the symbol(s) which is indicated as Flexible by a previous GC-PDCCH
  • the UE 102 may follow the same GC-PDCCH monitoring procedure, namely the UE 102 may monitor GC-PDCCH.
  • a given GC-PDCCH monitoring occasion entirely or partially includes the symbol(s) which is indicated as DL or UL by a previous GC-PDCCH, the UE 102 may not have to monitor GC-PDCCH in the GC-PDCCH monitoring occasion, except for the GC-PDCCH monitoring occasion located within the first 3 symbols in a slot.
  • the UE 102 may have to always monitor GCHPDCCH in the GC-PDCCH monitoring occasion located within the first 3 symbols in a slot, while the UE 102 may be allowed to skip monitoring of the GC-PDCCH in the other GC-PDCCH monitoring occasions which overlaps the symbol indicated as either DL or UL by a previous GC-PDCCH.
  • Figure 32 shows a dynamic SFI signaling for a wideband operation. LBT may be performed per LBT sub-band.
  • the gNB 160 may transmit GC-PDCCH on a given LBT sub-band, preferably periodically, and the UE 102 may monitor the GC-PDCCH on the LBT sub-band, preferably on periodic monitoring occasions.
  • the GC-PDCCH may carry the DCI format for indicating slot format(s) of the LBT sub-band where the GC-PDCCH is detected, and the GC-PDCCH also carry the DCI format for indicating slot format(s) of another LBT sub-band.
  • the GC-PDCCH may carry the DCI format for indicating slot format(s) of the LBT sub-band where the GC-PDCCH is detected, and the DCI format may also indicate slot format(s) of another LBT sub-band.
  • the other LBT sub-band may be an LBT sub-band in the same BWP of the same serving.
  • the other LBT sub-band may be an LBT sub-band in a different BWP in another serving cell.
  • Figure 33 shows a dynamic SFI signaling for a wideband operation.
  • both aperiodic GC-PDCCH and periodic GC-PDCCH are used.
  • the gNB 160 may transmit aperiodic GC-PDCCH in each LBT sub-band, while the gNB 160 may transmit periodic GC-PDCCH in a given (not limited to one) LBT sub-band(s).
  • the contents of aperiodic GC-PDCCH and periodic GC-PDCCH may have to be aligned.
  • the symbol(s) indicated as DL, UL, and/or Flexible by the aperiodic GC-PDCCH may have to be indicates as DL, UL, and/or Flexible by the periodic GC-PDCCH, respectively, and the UE 102 may not expect they are indicated as different values.
  • the symbol(s) indicated as DL, UL, and/or Flexible by the aperiodic GC-PDCCH may be indicates as a different value and therefore overridden by the periodic GC-PDCCH.
  • the symbol(s) indicated as DL and UL by the aperiodic GC-PDCCH may have to be indicates as DL and UL by the periodic GC-PDCCH, while the symbol(s) indicated as Flexible by the aperiodic GC-PDCCH may be indicates as DL and UL and therefore overridden by the periodic GC-PDCCH.
  • the PDCCH monitoring occasion configurations (e.g. search space configurations) for aperiodic GC-PDCCH and periodic GC-PDCCH may be provided individually by respective dedicated configuration messages via dedicated RRC signaling.
  • the entries of SFI combinations for aperiodic GC-PDCCH and periodic GC-PDCCH may be provided by a same dedicated configuration message via dedicated RRC signaling.
  • the entry sets of SFI combinations for aperiodic GC-PDCCH and periodic GC-PDCCH may be provided individually by different dedicated configuration messages via dedicated RRC signaling.
  • the entry sets of SFI combinations for aperiodic GC-PDCCH for an initial BWP and the other GC-PDCCHs may be provided individually via common RRC signaling (e.g. included in broad cast information such as system information) and dedicated RRC signaling, respectively.
  • the entry sets of SFI combinations for periodic GC-PDCCH for PCell and the other GC-PDCCHs may be provided individually via common RRC signaling (e.g. included in broad cast information such as system information) and dedicated RRC signaling, respectively. If the entries are configured by the common RRC signaling, the number of entries may be less than the aforementioned configuration.
  • the entries may be pre ⁇ configured (i.e. fixed in the system), instead of being configurable via common RRC signaling.
  • aperiodic GC-PDCCH and periodic GC-PDCCH may be with different types.
  • the aperiodic GC-PDCCH may indicate slot format(s) as explained below
  • the periodic GC-PDCCH may indicate a location of UL portion of the COT, where the UL portion may be indicated by a combination of an offset to the starting symbol of the UL portion and the duration of the UL potion.
  • the UE 102 may consider the indicated DL portion as DL but may ignore the indicated UL portion.
  • the periodic GC-PDCCH may indicate slot format(s) as explained below, the UE 102 may consider the indicated UL portion as UL but may ignore the indicated DL portion.
  • aperiodic GC-PDCCH and periodic GC-PDCCH may be with a same type.
  • both the aperiodic GC-PDCCH and the periodic GC-PDCCH may indicate slot format(s) as explained below.
  • Figure 34 shows a dynamic SFI signaling for a wideband operation.
  • both aperiodic GC-PDCCH and periodic GC-PDCCH are used.
  • the difference from the example in Figure 33 is that a grouping is applied to LBT sub-band#0 and LBT sub-band #1.
  • the aperiodic GC-PDCCH may be transmitted/monitored per group, i.e. on one LBT sub-band within a group.
  • the periodic GC-PDCCH which indicates slot formats of grouped LBT sub-bands may be transmitted/monitored per group, i.e. on one LBT sub-band within a group.
  • the periodic GC-PDCCH may indicate slot formats of all LBT sub-bands within the group.
  • GC-PDCCH may be transmitted by the gNB 160 multiple times within a COT. Multiple GC-PDCCHs detected by the UE 102 in different monitoring occasions may indicate slot format(s) of a same slot(s).
  • Figure 35 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling.
  • a COT includes an initial partial DL slot followed by 4 full DL slot, a special slot (e.g. slot format #28 in Table 1 ) and then 2 full UL slot, where the special slot is a slot including DL part followed by a gap, and then UL part.
  • the slots of which SFIs are indicated by a single SFI combination may correspond to a single COT.
  • the gNB 160 may provide an RRC configuration for configuring multiple SFI combinations. Some of the SFI combinations may indicate a same DL/UL configuration of the COT but may correspond to different GC-PDCCH transmission timings and GC-PDCCH monitoring occasions.
  • the UE 102 Before detection of the GC-PDCCH in slot 1 (i.e. the starting slot of the COT), the UE 102 has not detected any GC-PDCCH of which the SFI indicates GC-PDCCH monitoring occasion in a middle of the slot 1. Therefore, the UE 102 may monitor GC-PDCCH on the GC-PDCCH monitoring occasion in a middle of the slot 1. If the UE 102 detects GC-PDCCH in a middle of the slot 1 , the UE 102 may assume there is an initial partial slot in the slot 1 , and the initial partial slot includes the detected GC-PDCCH.
  • the value of the SFHndex field of the GC-PDCCH in the initial partial slot may indicate SFI combination #0 which consists of SFI#0 for slot 1 (i.e. the initial partial slot), SFI#0 for slots 2, 3, 4 and 5, SFI#28 for slot 6, and SFI#1 for slots 7 and 8.
  • the UE 102 may be aware of the slot 1 is an initial partial slot, because the UE 102 has detected the GC-PDCCH in a middle of the slot 1. Therefore, the UE 102 may assume the OFDM symbols located before the GC-PDCCH within the slot 1 are not occupied (e.g.
  • the GC-PDCCH assumed to be indicated as Flexible by the GC-PDCCH) by the transmission containing the GC-PDCCH, even though the signaled slot format for the slot 1 indicates those symbols are DL symbols.
  • the value of the SFHndex field of the GC-PDCCH in the slot 2 may indicate SFI combination #1 which consists of SFI#0 for slots 2, 3, 4 and 5, SFI#28 for slot 6, and SFI#1 for slots 7 and 8.
  • SFI combination #1 which consists of SFI#0 for slots 2, 3, 4 and 5, SFI#28 for slot 6, and SFI#1 for slots 7 and 8.
  • the initial partial slot may be indicated by a slot format.
  • the Table 1 may additionally include a single slot format which indicate at least one OFDM symbol in a slot is not occupied by the current transmission while the ending part of the same slot is occupied by the current transmission.
  • the Table 1 may additionally include multiple slot formats each of which indicates at least one OFDM symbol in a slot is not occupied by the current transmission while the ending part of the same slot is occupied by the current transmission, and the multiple slot formats may correspond to different numbers of unoccupied (e.g. Flexible) OFDM symbols at the beginning part of the slot and/or different numbers of occupied (e.g. DL) OFDM symbols at the ending part of the slot.
  • the additional entries described in Table 2 may be added by overriding of reserved entries in Table 1.
  • the additional entries may be added by overriding of all or some of the Table-1 entries 46 to 54 which correspond to UL-to-DL switching in a middle of the slot.
  • the slot formats in Table 2 may be applicable to NR-U serving cells but not to non NR-U serving cells. If the serving cell is NR-U, the additional entries can be used.
  • the UE 102 may use the entries in Table 1 only.
  • the use of the additional entries may be configured by RRC signaling. In this case, if the RRC configuration is provided, the additional entries can be used. Otherwise the UE 102 may use the entries in Table 1 only.
  • Table 2 Additional slot formats.
  • Figure 36 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling.
  • a COT includes an initial partial DL slot followed by 4 full DL slot, a special slot (e.g. slot format #28 in Table 1 ) and then 2 full UL slot.
  • the gNB 160 may provide an RRC configuration for configuring multiple SFI combinations.
  • One of the SFI combinations may indicate a DL/UL configuration of the COT and may correspond to all of the GC-PDCCH transmission timings and all of the GC-PDCCH monitoring occasions.
  • the SFHndex fields of the GC-PDCCHs may indicate the same SFI combination which consists of SFI#0 for slot 1 (i.e.
  • the GC-PDCCH may also have a bit field to indicate additional information, where the additional information may change depending on the GC-PDCCH transmission timings and the GC-PDCCH monitoring occasions.
  • the additional information may indicate a location of a certain slot (preferably the starting slot, but it works with another type of slot, e.g. the ending slot or the slot where the GC-PDCCH is detected) of the slots of which the SFIs are indicated by the detected GC-PDCCH which also carries the information concerned.
  • the location may be a relative location (also referred to as a slot offset or a time-domain shift with a unit of slot) from (or to) the slot where the GC-PDCCH carrying the concerned information is detected.
  • the starting slot indicated by the concerned information may also be the slot which the current COT starts with. Alternatively, the starting slot indicated by the concerned information may not always be the same as the slot which the current COT starts with. Additionally and/or alternatively, the location may be a location within a radio frame where the GC-PDCCH carrying the concerned information is detected, and the additional information may indicate a slot index of the starting slot within a radio frame.
  • the CG-PDCCH may include a single SFHndex field, and the value of the SFHndex field may apply to multiple LBT sub-bands. Additionally and/or alternatively, the CG-PDCCH may include a multiple SFHndex fields, and the value of each SFHndex field may apply to a respective LBT sub-band.
  • the CG-PDCCH may include a single bit field for indicating the COT starting timing, and the value of the bit field may apply to multiple LBT sub-bands.
  • the CG-PDCCH may include multiple bit fields for indicating the COT starting timing, and the value of each bit field may apply to a respective LBT sub-band.
  • the CG-PDCCH may include a single SFHndex field and multiple bit fields for indicating the COT starting timing.
  • the CG-PDCCH may include multiple SFHndex fields and a single bit field for indicating the COT starting timings.
  • Figure 37 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling.
  • the slots of which the SFIs are indicated by a GC-PDCCH ends with an ending partial UL slot.
  • the slot format of the ending partial UL slot may be indicated by one or more additional entries (i.e. additional formats) of Table 1.
  • additional entries i.e. additional formats
  • the entries described in Table 3 may be added in Table 1.
  • Each of the additional entries may indicate the slot format that consists of a consecutive UL symbol(s) and a consecutive Flexible symbol(s) and starts with a UL symbol and ends with a Flexible symbol.
  • the additional entries may be added by overriding of reserved entries in Table 1.
  • the additional entries may be added by overriding of all or some of the Table-1 entries 46 to 54 which correspond to UL-to-DL switching in a middle of the slot.
  • the slot formats in Table 3 may be applicable to NR-U serving cells but not to non NR-U serving cells. If the serving cell is NR-U, the additional entries can be used. Otherwise, the UE 102 may use the entries in Table 1 only.
  • the use of the additional entries may be configured by RRC signaling. In this case, if the RRC configuration is provided, the additional entries can be used. Otherwise the UE 102 may use the entries in Table 1 only.
  • the gNB 160 may need to provide the RRC signaling for configuring multiple SFI combinations which correspond to different ending partial UL slot structures, and to send a GC-PDCCH having SFHndex field which is set to an appropriate value (i.e. the value corresponding to the ending partial UL slot structure that the gNB 160 is intending).
  • the UE 102 may assume those Flexible symbols are not occupied by the transmission where the GC-PDCCH is transmitted and that those Flexible symbols are outside of the COT where the GC-PDCCH is transmitted, while UL symbols in the same slot may be considered as inside of the COT.
  • the CG-PDCCH may include a single SFHndex field, and the value of the SFHndex field may apply to multiple LBT sub-bands. Additionally and/or alternatively, the CG-PDCCH may include a multiple SFHndex fields, and the value of each SFHndex field may apply to a respective LBT sub-band.
  • Figure 38 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling.
  • the slots of which the SFIs are indicated by a GC-PDCCH ends with an ending partial UL slot.
  • the reason may be because the COT started in a middle of a starting slot and therefore maximum COT duration starting immediately after the successful channel access has to end in a middle of the last slot.
  • the slot format of the ending partial UL slot may be indicated as an UL slot, i.e. the normal slot which is fully occupied with UL symbols.
  • the GC-PDCCH may also have a bit field to indicate additional information, where the additional information may change depending on the ending partial UL slot structure.
  • the additional information may indicate a selected one of the possible slot formats.
  • the possible slot formats may be defined as in Table 3 (also possibly including an entry, e.g. the entry SFI#0 in Table 1 , for indicating that the slot is not an ending partial UL slot) separately from Table 1 , and the bit field may be set to a value corresponding to one of X0 to X12.
  • the UE 102 may assume the ending slot in an ending partial UL slot indicated by the additional bit field but may not assume the ending slot in a normal slot indicated by the SFHndex field.
  • the additional information may indicate a COT length.
  • the COT length may be expressed with the number of OFDM symbols, the number of slots or a combination of them within the COT. If the UE 102 is signaled with the COT length, the UE 102 may derive an ending timing of the COT, based on the signaled COT length and a reference timing (e.g. the COT starting timing).
  • the COT starting timing as the reference may be determined by the detection timing of the first GC-PDCCH of which the indicated SFI is the same as of the current GC-PDCCH.
  • the COT starting timing may be determined by the detection timing of the current GC-PDCCH and the aforementioned bit field for indicating the starting slot location.
  • the reference to determine the end timing of the COT may be the location of the symbol #0 of the starting slot of the COT or may be the location of the earliest occupied OFDM symbol of the starting slot.
  • the additional information may indicate a remaining COT length.
  • the COT length may be expressed with the number of OFDM symbols, the number of slots or a combination of them within the COT. If the UE 102 is signaled with the remaining COT length, the UE 102 may derive an ending timing of the COT, based on the signaled remaining COT length and a reference timing (e.g. the starting or ending OFDM symbol of the slot where the concerned GC-PDCCH is detected, the starting or ending OFDM symbol of the symbols where the concerned GC-PDCCH is detected or the starting OFDM symbol of the next slot).
  • a reference timing e.g. the starting or ending OFDM symbol of the slot where the concerned GC-PDCCH is detected, the starting or ending OFDM symbol of the symbols where the concerned GC-PDCCH is detected or the starting OFDM symbol of the next slot.
  • the CG-PDCCH may include a single SFHndex field, and the value of the SFHndex field may apply to multiple LBT sub-bands. Additionally and/or alternatively, the CG-PDCCH may include a multiple SFHndex fields, and the value of each SFHndex field may apply to a respective LBT sub-band.
  • the CG-PDCCH may include a single bit field for indicating the ending partial UL structure, the COT length or the remaining COT length, and the value of the bit field may apply to multiple LBT sub-bands.
  • the CG-PDCCH may include multiple bit fields for indicating the ending partial UL structure, the COT length or the remaining COT length, and the value of each bit field may apply to a respective LBT sub-band.
  • the CG-PDCCH may include a single SFHndex field and multiple bit fields for indicating the ending partial UL structure, the COT length or the remaining COT length.
  • the CG-PDCCH may include multiple SFHndex fields and a single bit field for indicating the ending partial UL structure, the COT length or the remaining COT length.
  • Figure 39 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling.
  • the slots of which the SFIs are indicated by a GC-PDCCH includes more than one DL-to-UL or UL-to-DL switching points and/or ends with an ending partial UL slot.
  • the structure of a UL partial slot (like the 5 th slot from left in the figure) in a middle of the slots of which the SFIs are indicated by the GC-PDCCH may be indicated by the SFHndex field of the GC-PDCCH as mention above, while the structure of a UL partial slot (like the 8 th slot from left in the figure) at the end of the slots of which the SFIs are indicated by the GC-PDCCH may be indicated by the aforementioned additional information.
  • This scheme may also apply to the wideband operation.
  • the UE 102 of which the UL transmission is scheduled may determine LBT type for the UL transmission, taking into account whether or not the UL transmission would be done within a COT explicitly and/or implicitly signaled by the gNB 160. For example, if the whole UL transmission is scheduled to be transmitted within the COT, the 102 may be allowed to perform Cat-2 LBT for the UL transmission. If at least a part of the UL transmission would be transmitted outside of the COT, the 102 may not be allowed to perform Cat-2 LBT for the UL transmission and therefore may perform Cat-4 LBT for the UL transmission.
  • FIG 40 shows a method for a UE which communicates with a base station.
  • the method may comprise acquiring radio resource control (RRC) configuration information (Step 4001 ).
  • the RRC configuration information may indicate a monitoring occasion.
  • the method may also comprise monitoring, in a first sub-band, a first physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with a first down link control (DCI) format (Step 4002).
  • the first DCI format may include a first information field and a second information field.
  • the first information field may indicate a first slot format combination.
  • the second information field may indicate a second slot format combination.
  • the first slot format combination may be applied to the first sub-band.
  • the second slot format combination may be applied to a second sub-band.
  • the first sub-band and the second sub-band may be included in a same downlink bandwidth part (DL BWP).
  • DL BWP downlink bandwidth part
  • FIG 41 shows a method for a base station which communicates with a UE.
  • the method may comprise sending radio resource control (RRC) configuration information (Step 4101 ).
  • the RRC configuration information may indicate a monitoring occasion.
  • the method may also comprise transmitting, in a first sub-band, a first physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with a first down link control (DCI) format (Step 4102).
  • the first DCI format may include a first information field and a second information field.
  • the first information field may indicate a first slot format combination.
  • the second information field may indicate a second slot format combination.
  • the first slot format combination may be applied to the first sub-band.
  • the second slot format combination may be applied to a second sub-band.
  • the first sub-band and the second sub-band may be included in a same downlink bandwidth part (DL BWP).
  • DL BWP downlink bandwidth part
  • the UE 102 and the gNB. 160 may have to assume same procedures. For example, when the UE 102 follows a given procedure (e.g., the procedure described above), the gNB 160 may also have to assume that the UE 102 follows the procedure. Additionally, the gNB 160 may also have to perform the corresponding procedures. Similarly, when the gNB 160 follows a given procedure, the UE 102 may also have to assume that the gNB 160 follows the procedure. Additionally, the UE 102 may also have to perform the corresponding procedures. The physical signals and/or channels that the UE 102 receives may be transmitted by the gNB 160.
  • a given procedure e.g., the procedure described above
  • the gNB 160 may also have to assume that the UE 102 follows the procedure. Additionally, the gNB 160 may also have to perform the corresponding procedures.
  • the physical signals and/or channels that the UE 102 receives may be transmitted by the gNB 160.
  • the physical signals and/or channels that the UE 102 transmits may be received by the gNB 160.
  • the higher-layer signals and/or channels (e.g., dedicated RRC configuration messages) that the UE 102 acquires may be sent by the gNB 160.
  • the higher-layer signals and/or channels (e.g., dedicated RRC configuration messages) that the UE 102 sends may be acquired by the gNB 160.
  • names of physical channels and/or signals described herein are examples.
  • Computer-readable medium refers to any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a processor.
  • the term“computer-readable medium,” as used herein, may denote a computer- and/or processor-readable medium that is non-transitory and tangible.
  • a computer-readable or processor-readable medium may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer or processor.
  • Disk and disc includes compact disc (CD), laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc (DVD), floppy disk and Blu-ray® disc where disks usually reproduce data magnetically, while discs reproduce data optically with lasers.
  • one or more of the methods described herein may be implemented in and/or performed using hardware.
  • one or more of the methods described herein may be implemented in and/or realized using a chipset, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a large-scale integrated circuit (LSI) or integrated circuit, etc.
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • LSI large-scale integrated circuit
  • Each of the methods disclosed herein comprises one or more steps or actions for achieving the described method.
  • the method steps and/or actions may be interchanged with one another and/or combined into a single step without departing from the scope of the claims.
  • the order and/or use of specific steps and/or actions may be modified without departing from the scope of the claims.
  • a program running on the gNB 160 or the UE 102 according to the described systems and methods is a program (a program for causing a computer to operate) that controls a CPU and the like in such a manner as to realize the function according to the described systems and methods. Then, the information that is handled in these apparatuses is temporarily stored in a RAM while being processed. Thereafter, the information is stored in various ROMs or HDDs, and whenever necessary, is read by the CPU to be modified or written.
  • a recording medium on which the program is stored among a semiconductor (for example, a ROM, a nonvolatile memory card, and the like), an optical storage medium (for example, a DVD, a MO, a MD, a CD, a BD, and the like), a magnetic storage medium (for example, a magnetic tape, a flexible disk, and the like), and the like, any one may be possible.
  • a semiconductor for example, a ROM, a nonvolatile memory card, and the like
  • an optical storage medium for example, a DVD, a MO, a MD, a CD, a BD, and the like
  • a magnetic storage medium for example, a magnetic tape, a flexible disk, and the like
  • the program stored on a portable recording medium can be distributed or the program can be transmitted to a server computer that connects through a network such as the Internet.
  • a storage device in the server computer also is included.
  • some or all of the gNB 160 and the UE 102 according to the systems and methods described above may be realized as an LSI that is a typical integrated circuit.
  • Each functional block of the gNB 160 and the UE 102 may be individually built into a chip, and some or all functional blocks may be integrated into a chip.
  • a technique of the integrated circuit is not limited to the LSI, and an integrated circuit for the functional block may be realized with a dedicated circuit or a general-purpose processor.
  • a technology of an integrated circuit that substitutes for the LSI appears, it is also possible to use an integrated circuit to which the technology applies.
  • each functional block or various features of the base station device and the terminal device used in each of the aforementioned embodiments may be implemented or executed by a circuitry, which is typically an integrated circuit or a plurality of integrated circuits.
  • the circuitry designed to execute the functions described in the present specification may comprise a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific or general application integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic, or a discrete hardware component, or a combination thereof.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, or alternatively, the processor may be a conventional processor, a controller, a microcontroller or a state machine.
  • the general-purpose processor or each circuit described above may be configured by a digital circuit or may be configured by an analogue circuit. Further, when a technology of making into an integrated circuit superseding integrated circuits at the present time appears due to advancement of a semiconductor technology, the integrated circuit by this technology is also able to be used.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A method for a user equipment (UE) which communicates with a base station is described. The method may comprise acquiring radio resource control (RRC) configuration information. The RRC configuration information may indicate a configuration of downlink control (DCI) format 2_0. The method may also comprise monitoring a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with the DCI format 2_0. The DCI format 2_0 may include a first information field. The first information field may indicate a remaining channel occupancy duration. The remaining channel occupancy duration may be expressed as the number of OFDM symbol(s) starting from a slot where the DCI format 2_0 is detected.

Description

DESCRIPTION
Title of Invention
User Equipments, Base Stations, and Methods
Technical Field
[0001] The present disclosure relates generally to communication systems. More specifically, the present disclosure relates to new signaling, procedures, user equipments (UEs), base stations and methods. The present application claims priority from Japanese Application JP201 9-060240, filed on March 27, 2019. The content of the Japanese Application is hereby incorporated by reference into this application. Background
[0002] Wireless communication devices have become smaller and more powerful in order to meet consumer needs and to improve portability and convenience. Consumers have become dependent upon wireless communication devices and have come to expect reliable service, expanded areas of coverage and increased functionality. A wireless communication system may provide communication for a number of wireless communication devices, each of which may be serviced by a base station. A base station may be a device that communicates with wireless communication devices.
[0003] As wireless communication devices have advanced, improvements in communication capacity, speed, flexibility and/or efficiency have been sought. However, improving communication capacity, speed, flexibility and/or efficiency may present certain problems.
[0004] For example, wireless communication devices may communicate with one or more devices using a communication structure. However, the communication structure used may only offer limited flexibility and/or efficiency. As illustrated by this discussion, systems and methods that improve communication flexibility and/or efficiency may be beneficial.
Summary of Invention
[0005] A user equipment (UE), which communicates with a base station, includes: higher layer processing circuitry configured to acquire radio resource control (RRC) configuration information, the RRC configuration information indicating a configuration of downlink control (DCI) format 2_0; and receiving circuitry configured to monitor a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with the DCI format 2_0. The DCI format 2_0 includes a first information field. The first information field indicates a remaining channel occupancy duration. The remaining channel occupancy duration is expressed as the number of OFDM symbol(s) starting from a slot where the DCI format 2_0 is detected.
[0006] A base station which communicates, with a user equipment (UE), includes: higher layer processing circuitry configured to send radio resource control (RRC) configuration information, the RRC configuration information indicating a configuration of downlink control (DCI) format 2_0; and transmitting circuitry configured to transmit a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with the DCI format 2_0. The DCI format 2_0 includes a first information field. The first information field indicates a remaining channel occupancy duration. The remaining channel occupancy duration is expressed as the number of OFDM symbol(s) starting from a slot where the DCI format 2_0 is transmitted.
[0007] A method for a user equipment (UE), which communicates with a base station, includes: acquiring radio resource control (RRC) configuration information, the RRC configuration information indicating a configuration of downlink control (DCI) format 2_0; and monitoring a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with the DCI format 2_0. The DCI format 2_0 includes a first information field. The first information field indicates a remaining channel occupancy duration. The remaining channel occupancy duration is expressed as the number of OFDM symbol(s) starting from a slot where the DCI format 2_0 is detected.
[0008] A method for a base station, which communicates with a user equipment (UE), includes: sending radio resource control (RRC) configuration information, the RRC configuration information indicating a configuration of downlink control (DCI) format 2_0; and transmitting a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with the DCI format 2_0. The DCI format 2_0 includes a first information field. The first information field indicates a remaining channel occupancy duration. The remaining channel occupancy duration is expressed as the number of OFDM symbol(s) starting from a slot where the DCI format 2_0 is transmitted.
Brief Description of the Drawings
[0009] [Fig. 1]Figure 1 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of one or more gNBs and one or more user equipments (UEs) in which systems and methods for downlink and uplink transmissions may be implemented;
[0010] [Fig. 2]Figure 2 illustrates various components that may be utilized in a UE;
[001 1] [Fig. 3]Figure 3 illustrates various components that may be utilized in a gNB; [0012] [Fig. 4]Figure 4 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of a UE in which systems and methods for downlink and uplink transmissions may be implemented;
[0013] [Fig. 5]Figure 5 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of a gNB in which systems and methods for downlink and uplink transmissions may be implemented;
[0014] [Fig. 6]Figure 6 is a diagram illustrating one example of a resource grid;
[0015] [Fig. 7]Figure 7 shows examples of several numerologies;
[0016] [Fig. 8]Figure 8 shows examples of subframe structures for the numerologies that are shown in Figure 7;
[001 7] [Fig. 9]Figure 9 shows examples of subframe structures for the numerologies that are shown in Figure 7;
[0018] [Fig. 10]Figure 10 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of a gNB;
[0019] [Fig. 1 1]Figure 1 1 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of a UE;
[0020] [Fig. 12] Figure 12 illustrates an example of control resource unit and reference signal structure;
[0021] [Fig. 13]Figure 13 illustrates an example of control channel and shared channel multiplexing;
[0022] [Fig. 14]Figure 14 illustrates PDCCH monitoring occasions for slot-based scheduling;
[0023] [Fig. 15]Figure 15 illustrates PDCCH monitoring occasions for non-slot-based scheduling; [0024] [Fig. 16]Figure 16 shows an example of Channel Access procedure;
[0025] [Fig. 17]Figure 17 shows an example of deferment of transmission;
[0026] [Fig. 18]Figure 18 shows an example of channel access priority class for downlink transmission(s);
[0027] [Fig. 19]Figure 19 shows an example of channel access priority class for uplink transmission(s);
[0028] [Fig. 20]Figure 20 shows an example of Channel Access procedure;
[0029] [Fig. 21]Figure 21 shows an example of Channel Access procedure;
[0030] [Fig. 22]Figure 22 shows an example of Channel Access procedure;
[0031] [Fig. 23]Figure 23 shows an example of CW size adjustment;
[0032] [Fig. 24]Figure 24 shows an example of LBT for a transmission with a directional beam;
[0033] [Fig. 25]Figure 25 shows an example of LBT for a transmission with a directional beam;
[0034] [Fig. 26]Figure 26 shows an example of sub-band configuration;
[0035] [Fig. 27]Figure 27 shows an example of PDCCH monitoring occasions;
[0036] [Fig. 28]Figure 28 shows an example of triggering signal and CORESET resource allocation;
[0037] [Fig. 29]Figure 29 shows an example of triggering signal and CORESET resource allocation;
[0038] [Fig. 30]Figure 30 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling;
[0039] [Fig. 31]Figure 31 shows a dynamic SFI signaling for a wideband operation;
[0040] [Fig. 32]Figure 32 shows a dynamic SFI signaling for a wideband operation; [0041] [Fig. 33]Figure 33 shows a dynamic SFI signaling for a wideband operation;
[0042] [Fig. 34]Figure 34 shows a dynamic SFI signaling for a wideband operation;
[0043] [Fig. 35]Figure 35 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling;
[0044] [Fig. 36]Figure 36 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling;
[0045] [Fig. 37]Figure 37 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling;
[0046] [Fig. 38]Figure 38 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling;
[0047] [Fig. 39]Figure 39 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling;
[0048] [Fig. 40]Figure 40 shows a method for a UE which communicates with a base station; and
[0049] [Fig. 41]Figure 41 shows a method for a base station which communicates with a UE.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0050] A user equipment (UE) which communicates with a base station is described. The UE may comprise higher layer processing circuitry configured to acquire radio resource control (RRC) configuration information. The RRC configuration information may indicate one or more entries, each of the entries specifying a slot format. The UE may also comprise receiving circuitry configured to receive a physical signal and a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with a down link control (DCI) format. The DCI format may include a first information field and a second information field. The first information field may indicate an entry out of the entries. The second information field may indicate a time domain location of a first symbol within a first slot format. The first symbol may be an initial symbol on which the PDCCH is mapped. The first slot format is a slot format corresponding to the indicated entry.
[0051] A user equipment (UE) which communicates with a base station is described. The UE may comprise higher layer processing circuitry configured to acquire radio resource control (RRC) configuration information. The RRC configuration information may specify more than one control resource sets
(CORESETs) in a bandwidth part (BWP). The UE may also comprise receiving circuitry configured to receive more than one physical downlink control channels (PDCCHs) in the CORESETs and a physical downlink control channel (PDSCH) in the BWP. If the PDCCHs schedule the PDSCH, one of the PDCCH may be considered to be valid and all the other PDCCHs may be considered to be invalid.
[0052] A user equipment (UE) which communicates with a base station is described. The UE may comprise higher layer processing circuitry configured to acquire radio resource control (RRC) configuration information, the RRC configuration information indicating a monitoring occasion. The UE may also comprise receiving circuitry configured to monitor, in a first sub-band, a first physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with a first down link control (DCI) format. The first DCI format may include a first information field and a second information field. The first information field may indicate a first slot format combination. The second information field may indicate a second slot format combination. The first slot format combination may be applied to the first sub-band. The second slot format combination may be applied to a second sub-band. The first sub-band and the second sub-band may be included in a same downlink bandwidth part (DL BWP).
[0053] The receiving circuitry may also be configured to monitor, in a first sub-band, a second PDCCH with a second DCI format. The receiving circuitry may further be configured to monitor, in a second sub-band, a third PDCCH with a third DCI format. The second DCI format may include a third information field. The third information field may indicate a fourth slot format combination. The fourth slot format combination may be applied to the first sub-band. The third DCI format may include a forth information field. The fourth information field may indicate a fifth slot format combination. The fifth slot format combination may be applied to the second sub-band.
[0054] A base station which communicates with a user equipment (UE) is described. The base station may comprise higher layer processing circuitry configured to send radio resource control (RRC) configuration information, the RRC configuration information indicating a monitoring occasion. The base station may also comprise transmitting circuitry configured to transmit, in a first sub-band, a first physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with a first down link control (DCI) format. The first DCI format may include a first information field and a second information field. The first information field may indicate a first slot format combination. The second information field may indicate a second slot format combination. The first slot format combination may be applied to the first sub-band.
The second slot format combination may be applied to a second sub-band. The first sub-band and the second sub-band may be included in a same downlink bandwidth part (DL BWP).
[0055] The transmitting circuitry may also be configured to transmit, in a first sub-band, a second PDCCH with a second DCI format. The transmitting circuitry may further be configured to transmit, in a second sub-band, a third PDCCH with a third DCI format. The second DCI format may include a third information field. The third information field may indicate a fourth slot format combination. The fourth slot format combination may be applied to the first sub-band. The third DCI format may include a forth information field. The fourth information field may indicate a fifth slot format combination. The fifth slot format combination may be applied to the second sub-band.
[0056] A method for a user equipment (UE) which communicates with a base station is described. The method may comprise acquiring radio resource control (RRC) configuration information. The RRC configuration information may indicate a monitoring occasion. The method may also comprise monitoring, in a first sub-band, a first physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with a first down link control (DCI) format. The first DCI format may include a first information field and a second information field. The first information field may indicate a first slot format combination. The second information field may indicate a second slot format combination. The first slot format combination may be applied to the first sub-band. The second slot format combination may be applied to a second sub-band. The first sub-band and the second sub-band may be included in a same downlink bandwidth part (DL BWP). [0057] A method for a base station which communicates with a user equipment (UE) is described. The method may comprise sending radio resource control (RRC) configuration information. The RRC configuration information may indicate a monitoring occasion. The method may also comprise transmitting, in a first sub-band, a first physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with a first down link control (DCI) format. The first DCI format may include a first information field and a second information field. The first information field may indicate a first slot format combination. The second information field may indicate a second slot format combination. The first slot format combination may be applied to the first sub-band. The second slot format combination may be applied to a second sub-band. The first sub-band and the second sub-band may be included in a same downlink bandwidth part (DL BWP).
[0058] The 3rd Generation Partnership Project, also referred to as“3GPP,” is a collaboration agreement that aims to define globally applicable technical specifications and technical reports for third and fourth generation wireless communication systems. The 3GPP may define specifications for next generation mobile networks, systems and devices.
[0059] 3GPP Long Term Evolution (LTE) is the name given to a project to improve the Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) mobile phone or device standard to cope with future requirements. In one aspect, UMTS has been modified to provide support and specification for the Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network
(E-UTRAN). [0060] At least some aspects of the systems and methods disclosed herein may be described in relation to the 3GPP LTE, LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) and other standards (e.g., 3GPP Releases 8, 9, 10, 1 1 , 12, 13, 14 and/ or 15) including New Radio (NR) which is also known as The 3rd Generation NR (5G NR). However, the scope of the present disclosure should not be limited in this regard. At least some aspects of the systems and methods disclosed herein may be utilized in other types of wireless communication systems.
[0061] A wireless communication device may be an electronic device used to communicate voice and/or data to a base station, which in turn may communicate with a network of devices (e.g., public switched telephone network (PSTN), the Internet, etc.). In describing systems and methods herein, a wireless communication device may alternatively be referred to as a mobile station, a UE, an access terminal, a subscriber station, a mobile terminal, a remote station, a user terminal, a terminal, a subscriber unit, a mobile device, etc. Examples of wireless communication devices include cellular phones, smart phones, personal digital assistants (PDAs), laptop computers, netbooks, e-readers, wireless modems, vehicles, Internet of Things (IoT) devices, etc. In 3GPP specifications, a wireless communication device is typically referred to as a UE. However, as the scope of the present disclosure should not be limited to the 3GPP standards, the terms “UE” and “wireless communication device” may be used interchangeably herein to mean the more general term “wireless communication device.” A UE may also be more generally referred to as a terminal device.
[0062] In 3GPP specifications, a base station is typically referred to as a Node B, an evolved Node B (eNB), a home enhanced or evolved Node B (HeNB), a next Generation Node B (gNB) or some other similar terminology. As the scope of the disclosure should not be limited to 3GPP standards, the terms“base station,”“Node B,” “eNB,” “HeNB,” and “gNB” may be used interchangeably herein to mean the more general term “base station.” Furthermore, the term “base station” may be used to denote an access point. An access point may be an electronic device that provides access to a network (e.g., Local Area Network (LAN), the Internet, etc.) for wireless communication devices. The term“communication device” may be used to denote both a wireless communication device and/or a base station. An eNB and gNB may also be more generally referred to as a base station device.
[0063] It should be noted that as used herein, a“cell” may be any communication channel that is specified by standardization or regulatory bodies to be used for International Mobile Telecommunications-Advanced (IMT-Advanced) and all of it or a subset of it may be adopted by 3GPP as licensed bands (e.g., frequency bands) to be used for communication between an eNB and a UE. It should also be noted that in E-UTRA and E-UTRAN overall description, as used herein, a“cell” may be defined as“combination of downlink and optionally uplink resources.” The linking between the carrier frequency of the downlink resources and the carrier frequency of the uplink resources may be indicated in the system information transmitted on the downlink resources.
[0064] “Configured cells” are those cells of which the UE is aware and is allowed by an eNB to transmit or receive information.“Configured cell(s)” may be serving cell(s). The UE may receive system information and perform the required measurements on all configured cells. “Configured cell(s)” for a radio connection may include a primary cell and/or no, one, or more secondary cell(s). “Activated cells” are those configured cells on which the UE is transmitting and receiving. That is, activated cells are those cells for which the UE monitors the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) and in the case of a downlink transmission, those cells for which the UE decodes a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH).“Deactivated cells” are those configured cells that the UE is not monitoring the transmission PDCCH. It should be noted that a “cell” may be described in terms of differing dimensions. For example, a“cell” may have temporal, spatial (e.g., geographical) and frequency characteristics.
[0065] The 5th generation communication systems, dubbed NR (New Radio technologies) by 3GPP, envision the use of time/frequency/space resources to allow for services, such as eMBB (enhanced Mobile Broad-Band) transmission, URLLC (Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication) transmission, and eMTC (massive Machine Type Communication) transmission. Also, in NR, single-beam and/or multi-beam operations is considered for downlink and/or uplink transmissions.
[0066] Various examples of the systems and methods disclosed herein are now described with reference to the Figures, where like reference numbers may indicate functionally similar elements. The systems and methods as generally described and illustrated in the Figures herein could be arranged and designed in a wide variety of different implementations. Thus, the following more detailed description of several implementations, as represented in the Figures, is not intended to limit scope, as claimed, but is merely representative of the systems and methods.
[0067] Figure 1 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of one or more gNBs 160 and one or more UEs 102 in which systems and methods for downlink and uplink transmissions may be implemented. The one or more UEs 102 communicate with one or more gNBs 160 using one or more physical antennas 122a-n. For example, a UE 102 transmits electromagnetic signals to the gNB 160 and receives electromagnetic signals from the gNB 160 using the one or more physical antennas 122a-n. The gNB 160 communicates with the UE 102 using one or more physical antennas 180a-n.
[0068] The UE 102 and the gNB 160 may use one or more channels and/or one or more signals 1 19, 121 to communicate with each other. For example, the UE 102 may transmit information or data to the gNB 160 using one or more uplink channels 121. Examples of uplink channels 121 include a physical shared channel (e.g., PUSCH (Physical Uplink Shared Channel)), and/or a physical control channel (e.g., PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control Channel)), etc. The one or more gNBs 160 may also transmit information or data to the one or more UEs 102 using one or more downlink channels 1 19, for instance. Examples of downlink channels 1 19 physical shared channel (e.g., PDSCH (Physical Downlink Shared Channel), and/or a physical control channel (PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel)), etc. Other kinds of channels and/or signals may be used.
[0069] Each of the one or more UEs 102 may include one or more transceivers 1 18, one or more demodulators 1 14, one or more decoders 108, one or more encoders 150, one or more modulators 154, a data buffer 104 and a UE operations module 124. For example, one or more reception and/or transmission paths may be implemented in the UE 102. For convenience, only a single transceiver 1 18, decoder 108, demodulator 1 14, encoder 150 and modulator 154 are illustrated in the UE 102, though multiple parallel elements (e.g., transceivers 1 18, decoders 108, demodulators 1 14, encoders 150 and modulators 154) may be implemented.
[0070] The transceiver 1 18 may include one or more receivers 120 and one or more transmitters 158. The one or more receivers 120 may receive signals from the gNB 160 using one or more antennas 122a~n. For example, the receiver 120 may receive and downconvert signals to produce one or more received signals 1 16. The one or more received signals 1 16 may be provided to a demodulator 1 14. The one or more receivers 120 may also sense the channel which would to be used for uplink transmissions. The one or more transmitters 158 may transmit signals to the gNB 160 using one or more physical antennas 122a~n. For example, the one or more transmitters 158 may upconvert and transmit one or more modulated signals 156.
[0071] The demodulator 1 14 may demodulate the one or more received signals 1 16 to produce one or more demodulated signals 1 12. The one or more demodulated signals 1 12 may be provided to the decoder 108. The UE 102 may use the decoder 108 to decode signals. The decoder 108 may produce decoded signals 1 10, which may include a UE-decoded signal 106 (also referred to as a first UE-decoded signal 106). For example, the first UE-decoded signal 106 may include received payload data, which may be stored in a data buffer 104. Another signal included in the decoded signals 1 10 (also referred to as a second UE-decoded signal 1 10) may include overhead data and/or control data. For example, the second UE-decoded signal 1 10 may provide data that may be used by the UE operations module 124 to perform one or more operations. [0072] In general, the UE operations module 124 may enable the UE 102 to communicate with the one or more gNBs 160. The UE operations module 124 may include one or more of a UE scheduling module 126.
[0073] The UE scheduling module 126 may also be referred to as UE-side higher layer processing module which performs higher layer processing. The other units than UE scheduling module 126 in UE 102 may perform physical layer processing.
[0074] In a radio communication system, physical channels (uplink physical channels and/or downlink physical channels) may be defined. The physical channels (uplink physical channels and/or downlink physical channels) may be used for transmitting information that is delivered from a higher layer. For example, PCCH (Physical Control Channel) may be defined. PCCH is used to transmit control information.
[0075] In uplink, PCCH (e.g., Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH)) is used for transmitting Uplink Control Information (UCI). The UCI may include Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ-ACK), Channel State information (CSI), and/or Scheduling Request (SR). The HARQ-ACK is used for indicating a positive acknowledgement (ACK) or a negative acknowledgment (NACK) for downlink data (i.e., Transport block(s) carrying Medium Access Control Control Element (MAC CE) and/or MAC Protocol Data Unit (MAC PDU) which may contain Downlink Shared Channel (DL-SCH)). The CSI is used for indicating state of downlink channel. Also, the SR is used for requesting resources of uplink data (i.e., Transport block(s) carrying MAC CE and/or MAC PDU which may contain Uplink Shared Channel
(UL-SCH)). [0076] The UE 102 may be configured, for DL, to receive code block group (CBG) based transmissions where retransmissions may be scheduled to carry one or more sub-sets of all the code blocks of a transport block. The UE 102 may be configured to transmit CBG based transmissions where retransmissions may be scheduled to carry one or more sub-sets of all the code blocks of a transport block.
[0077] In downlink, PCCH (e.g., Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH)) may be used for transmitting Downlink Control Information (DCI). Here, more than one DCI formats may be defined for DCI transmission on the PDCCH. Namely, fields may be defined in the DCI format, and the fields are mapped to the information bits (i.e., DCI bits). For example, a DCI format 1 A that is used for scheduling of one physical shared channel (PSCH) (e.g., PDSCH, transmission of one downlink transport block) in a cell is defined as the DCI format for the downlink. The DCI format(s) for PDSCH scheduling may include multiple information field, for example, carrier indicator field, frequency domain PDSCH resource allocation field, time domain PDSCH resource allocation field, bundling size field, MCS field, new data indicator field, redundancy version field, HARQ process number field, code block group flush indicator (CBGFI) field, code block group transmission indicator (CBGTI) field, PUCCH power control field, PUCCH resource indicator field, antenna port field, number of layer field, quasi-co-location (QCL) indication field, SRS triggering request field, and RNTI field. More than one pieces of the above information may be jointly coded, and in this instance jointly coded information may be indicated in a single information field.
[0078] Also, for example, a DCI format 0 that is used for scheduling of one PSCH (e.g., PUSCH, transmission of one uplink transport block) in a cell is defined as the DCI format for the uplink. For example, information associated with PSCH (a PDSCH resource, PUSCH resource) allocation, information associated with modulation and coding scheme (MCS) for PSCH, and DCI such as Transmission Power Control (TPC) command for PUSCH and/or PUCCH are included the DCI format. Also, the DCI format may include information associated with a beam index and/or an antenna port. The beam index may indicate a beam used for downlink transmissions and uplink transmissions. The antenna port may include DL antenna port and/or UL antenna port. The DCI format(s) for PUSCH scheduling may include multiple information field, for example, carrier indicator field, frequency domain PUSCH resource allocation field, time domain PUSCH resource allocation field, MCS field, new data indicator field, redundancy version field, HARQ process number field, code block group flush indicator (CBGFI) field, code block group transmission indicator (CBGTI) field, PUSCH power control field, SRS resource indicator (SRI) field, wideband and/or subband transmit precoding matrix indicator (TPMI) field, antenna port field, scrambling identity field, number of layer field, CSI report triggering request field, CSI measurement request field, SRS triggering request field, and RNTI field. More than one pieces of the above information may be jointly coded, and in this instance jointly coded information may be indicated in a single information field.
[0079] Also, for example, PSCH may be defined. For example, in a case that the downlink PSCH resource (e.g., PDSCH resource) is scheduled by using the DCI format, the UE 102 may receive the downlink data, on the scheduled downlink PSCH resource. Also, in a case that the uplink PSCH resource (e.g., PUSCH resource) is scheduled by using the DCI format, the UE 102 transmits the uplink data, on the scheduled uplink PSCH resource. Namely, the downlink PSCH is used to transmit the downlink data. And, the uplink PSCH is used to transmit the uplink data.
[0080] Furthermore, the downlink PSCH and the uplink PSCH are used to transmit information of higher layer (e.g., Radio Resource Control (RRC)) layer, and/or MAC layer). For example, the downlink PSCH and the uplink PSCH are used to transmit RRC message (RRC signal) and/or MAC Control Element (MAC CE). Here, the RRC message that is transmitted from the gNB 160 in downlink may be common to multiple UEs 102 within a cell (referred as a common RRC message). Also, the RRC message that is transmitted from the gNB 160 may be dedicated to a certain UE 102 (referred as a dedicated RRC message). The RRC message and/or the MAC CE are also referred to as a higher layer signal.
[0081] The UE operations module 124 may provide information 148 to the one or more receivers 120 For example, the UE operations module 124 may inform the receiver(s) 120 when to receive retransmissions.
[0082] The UE operations module 124 may provide information 138 to the demodulator 1 14. For example, the UE operations module 124 may inform the demodulator 1 14 of a modulation pattern anticipated for transmissions from the gNB 160.
[0083] The UE operations module 124 may provide information 136 to the decoder 108. For example, the UE operations module 124 may inform the decoder 108 of an anticipated encoding for transmissions from the gNB 160.
[0084] The UE operations module 124 may provide information 142 to the encoder 150. The information 142 may include data to be encoded and/or instructions for encoding. For example, the UE operations module 124 may instruct the encoder 150 to encode transmission data 146 and/or other information 142. The other information 142 may include PDSCH HARQ-ACK information.
[0085] The encoder 150 may encode transmission data 146 and/or other information 142 provided by the UE operations module 124. For example, encoding the transmission data 146 and/or other information 142 may involve error detection and/or correction coding, mapping data to space, time and/or frequency resources for transmission, multiplexing, etc. The encoder 150 may provide encoded data 152 to the modulator 154.
[0086] The UE operations module 124 may provide information 144 to the modulator 154. For example, the UE operations module 124 may inform the modulator 154 of a modulation type (e.g., constellation mapping) to be used for transmissions to the gNB 160. The modulator 154 may modulate the encoded data 152 to provide one or more modulated signals 156 to the one or more transmitters 158.
[0087] The UE operations module 124 may provide information 140 to the one or more transmitters 158. This information 140 may include instructions for the one or more transmitters 158. For example, the UE operations module 1 24 may instruct the one or more transmitters 158 when to transmit a signal to the gNB 160. For instance, the one or more transmitters 158 may transmit during a UL subframe. The one or more transmitters 158 may upconvert and transmit the modulated signal(s) 156 to one or more gNBs 160.
[0088] Each of the one or more gNBs 160 may include one or more transceivers 176, one or more demodulators 172, one or more decoders 166, one or more encoders 109, one or more modulators 1 13, a data buffer 162 and a gNB operations module 182. For example, one or more reception and/or transmission paths may be implemented in a gNB 160. For convenience, only a single transceiver 176, decoder 166, demodulator 172, encoder 109 and modulator 1 13 are illustrated in the gNB 160, though multiple parallel elements (e.g., transceivers 176, decoders 166, demodulators 172, encoders 109 and modulators 1 13) may be implemented.
[0089] The transceiver 176 may include one or more receivers 178 and one or more transmitters 1 17. The one or more receivers 178 may receive signals from the UE 102 using one or more physical antennas 180a~n. For example, the receiver 178 may receive and downconvert signals to produce one or more received signals 174. The one or more received signals 174 may be provided to a demodulator 172. The one or more receivers 178 may also sense the channel which would to be used for downlink transmissions. The one or more transmitters 1 17 may transmit signals to the UE 102 using one or more physical antennas 180a~n. For example, the one or more transmitters 1 17 may upconvert and transmit one or more modulated signals 1 15.
[0090] The demodulator 172 may demodulate the one or more received signals 1 74 to produce one or more demodulated signals 170. The one or more demodulated signals 170 may be provided to the decoder 166. The gNB 160 may use the decoder 166 to decode signals. The decoder 166 may produce one or more decoded signals 164, 168. For example, a first eNB-decoded signal 164 may include received payload data (e.g. UL TB), which may be stored in a data buffer 162. A second eNB-decoded signal 168 may include overhead data and/or control data. For example, the second eNB-decoded signal 168 may provide data (e.g., Uplink control information such as HARQ-ACK feedback information for PDSCH) that may be used by the gNB operations module 182 to perform one or more operations. [0091] In general, the gNB operations module 182 may enable the gNB 160 to communicate with the one or more UEs 102. The gNB operations module 182 may include one or more of a gNB scheduling module 194. The gNB scheduling module 194 may also be referred to as gNB-side higher layer processing module which performs higher layer processing. The other units than gNB scheduling module 194 in gNB 160 may perform physical layer processing.
[0092] The gNB operations module 182 may provide information 188 to the demodulator 1 72. For example, the gNB operations module 182 may inform the demodulator 172 of a modulation pattern anticipated for transmissions from the UE(s) 102.
[0093] The gNB operations module 182 may provide information 186 to the decoder 166. For example, the gNB operations module 182 may inform the decoder 166 of an anticipated encoding for transmissions from the UE(s) 102.
[0094] The gNB operations module 182 may provide information 101 to the encoder 109. The information 101 may include data to be encoded and/or instructions for encoding. For example, the gNB operations module 182 may instruct the encoder 109 to encode information 101 , including transmission data 105.
[0095] The encoder 109 may encode transmission data 105 and/or other information included in the information 101 provided by the gNB operations module 182. For example, encoding the transmission data 105 and/or other information included in the information 101 may involve error detection and/or correction coding, mapping data to space, time and/or frequency resources for transmission, multiplexing, etc. The encoder 109 may provide encoded data 1 1 1 to the modulator 1 13. The transmission data 105 may include network data to be relayed to the UE
102.
[0096] The gNB operations module 182 may provide information 103 to the modulator 1 13. This information 103 may include instructions for the modulator 1 13. For example, the gNB operations module 182 may inform the modulator 1 13 of a modulation type (e.g., constellation mapping) to be used for transmissions to the UE(s) 102. The modulator 1 13 may modulate the encoded data 1 1 1 to provide one or more modulated signals 1 15 to the one or more transmitters 1 17.
[0097] The gNB operations module 182 may provide information 192 to the one or more transmitters 1 17. This information 192 may include instructions for the one or more transmitters 1 17. For example, the gNB operations module 182 may instruct the one or more transmitters 1 17 when to (or when not to) transmit a signal to the UE(s) 102. The one or more transmitters 1 17 may upconvert and transmit the modulated signal(s) 1 15 to one or more UEs 102.
[0098] It should be noted that a DL subframe may be transmitted from the gNB 160 to one or more UEs 102 and that a UL subframe may be transmitted from one or more UEs 102 to the gNB 160. Furthermore, both the gNB 160 and the one or more UEs 102 may transmit data in a standard special slot.
[0099] It should also be noted that one or more of the elements or parts thereof included in the gNB(s) 160 and UE(s) 102 may be implemented in hardware. For example, one or more of these elements or parts thereof may be implemented as a chip, circuitry or hardware components, etc. It should also be noted that one or more of the functions or methods described herein may be implemented in and/or performed using hardware. For example, one or more of the methods described herein may be implemented in and/or realized using a chipset, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a large-scale integrated circuit (LSI) or integrated circuit, etc.
[0100] The downlink physical layer processing of transport channels may include: Transport block CRC attachment; Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment; Channel coding (LDPC coding); Physical-layer hybrid-ARQ processing; Rate matching; Scrambling; Modulation (QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM and 256QAM); Layer mapping; and Mapping to assigned resources and antenna ports.
[0101] Figure 2 illustrates various components that may be utilized in a UE 202. The UE 202 described in connection with Figure 2 may be implemented in accordance with the UE 22 described in connection with Figure 1. The UE 202 includes a processor 203 that controls operation of the UE 202. The processor 203 may also be referred to as a central processing unit (CPU). Memory 205, which may include read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), a combination of the two or any type of device that may store information, provides instructions 207a and data 209a to the processor 203. A portion of the memory 205 may also include non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM). Instructions 207b and data 209b may also reside in the processor 203. Instructions 207b and/or data 209b loaded into the processor 203 may also include instructions 207a and/or data 209a from memory 205 that were loaded for execution or processing by the processor 203. The instructions 207b may be executed by the processor 203 to implement the methods described above.
[0102] The UE 202 may also include a housing that contains one or more transmitters 258 and one or more receivers 220 to allow transmission and reception of data. The transmitter(s) 258 and receiver(s) 220 may be combined into one or more transceivers 218. One or more antennas 222a-n are attached to the housing and electrically coupled to the transceiver 218.
[0103] The various components of the UE 202 are coupled together by a bus system 21 1 , which may include a power bus, a control signal bus and a status signal bus, in addition to a data bus. However, for the sake of clarity, the various buses are illustrated in Figure 2 as the bus system 21 1. The UE 202 may also include a digital signal processor (DSP) 213 for use in processing signals. The UE 202 may also include a communications interface 215 that provides user access to the functions of the UE 202. The UE 202 illustrated in Figure 2 is a functional block diagram rather than a listing of specific components.
[0104] Figure 3 illustrates various components that may be utilized in a gNB 360. The gNB 360 described in connection with Figure 3 may be implemented in accordance with the gNB 160 described in connection with Figure 1. The gNB 360 includes a processor 303 that controls operation of the gNB 360. The processor 303 may also be referred to as a central processing unit (CPU). Memory 305, which may include read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), a combination of the two or any type of device that may store information, provides instructions 307a and data 309a to the processor 303. A portion of the memory 305 may also include non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM). Instructions 307b and data 309b may also reside in the processor 303. Instructions 307b and/or data 309b loaded into the processor 303 may also include instructions 307a and/or data 309a from memory 305 that were loaded for execution or processing by the processor 303. The instructions 307b may be executed by the processor 303 to implement the methods described above.
[0105] The gNB 360 may also include a housing that contains one or more transmitters 317 and one or more receivers 378 to allow transmission and reception of data. The transmitter(s) 317 and receiver(s) 378 may be combined into one or more transceivers 376. One or more antennas 380a-n are attached to the housing and electrically coupled to the transceiver 376.
[0106] The various components of the gNB 360 are coupled together by a bus system 31 1 , which may include a power bus, a control signal bus and a status signal bus, in addition to a data bus. However, for the sake of clarity, the various buses are illustrated in Figure 3 as the bus system 31 1. The gNB 360 may also include a digital signal processor (DSP) 313 for use in processing signals. The gNB 360 may also include a communications interface 315 that provides user access to the functions of the gNB 360. The gNB 360 illustrated in Figure 3 is a functional block diagram rather than a listing of specific components.
[0107] Figure 4 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of a UE 402 in which systems and methods for downlink and uplink transmissions may be implemented. The UE 402 includes transmit means 458, receive means 420 and control means 424. The transmit means 458, receive means 420 and control means 424 may be configured to perform one or more of the functions described in connection with Figure 1 above. Figure 2 above illustrates one example of a concrete apparatus structure of Figure 4. Other various structures may be implemented to realize one or more of the functions of Figure 1. For example, a DSP may be realized by software. [0108] Figure 5 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of a gNB 560 in which systems and methods for downlink and uplink transmissions may be implemented. The gNB 560 includes transmit means 51 7, receive means 578 and control means 582. The transmit means 51 7, receive means 578 and control means 582 may be configured to perform one or more of the functions described in connection with Figure 1 above. Figure 3 above illustrates one example of a concrete apparatus structure of Figure 5. Other various structures may be implemented to realize one or more of the functions of Figure 1. For example, a DSP may be realized by software.
[0109] Figure 6 is a diagram illustrating one example of a resource grid. The resource grid illustrated in Figure 6 may be applicable for both downlink and uplink and may be utilized in some implementations of the systems and methods disclosed herein. More detail regarding the resource grid is given in connection with Figure 1.
[01 10] In Figure 6, physical channels and physical signals may be transmitted/received using one or several slots 683. For a given numerology m, Nm BB is bandwidth configuration of a bandwidth part (BWP) in the serving cell, expressed in multiples of NRB SC, where NRB S0 is a resource block 689 size in the frequency domain expressed as a number of subcarriers, and
Figure imgf000029_0001
is the number of Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbols 687 in a subframe 669. In other words, For each numerology m and for each of downlink and uplink, a resource grid of Nm RBNKB 80 subcarriers and NSF,(1 symb OFDM symbols may be defined. There may be one resource grid per antenna port p, per subcarrier spacing configuration (i.e. numerology) m, and per transmission direction (uplink or downlink). A resource block 689 may include a number of resource elements (RE) 691. [01 1 1 ] Multiple OFDM numerologies (also referred to as just numerologies) are supported as given by Table X1 . Each of the numerologies may be tied to its own subcarrier spacing Af.
Table X1
Figure imgf000030_0003
[01 12] For subcarrier spacing configuration m, slots are numbered hm 3e{0,· · ·, NSF S|0t— 1 } in increasing order within a subframe and hm 3 ί6{0,· · ·, Nframe^S|0t— 1 } in increasing order within a frame. There are N slot' syiT1b consecutive OFDM symbols in a slot where N8ΐo1,m 3nhL depends on the subcarrier spacing used as given by Table X2 for normal cyclic prefix and Table X3 for extended cyclic prefix. The number of consecutive OFDM symbols per subframe is
Figure imgf000030_0001
The start of slot hm 3 in a subframe is aligned in time with the start of OFDM symbol hm 3
Figure imgf000030_0002
the same subframe. Not all UEs may be capable of simultaneous transmission and reception, implying that not all OFDM symbols in a downlink slot or an uplink slot may be used. Table X2
Figure imgf000031_0001
Table X3
Figure imgf000031_0002
[01 13] For an initial BWP , Ntl RB may be broadcast as a part of system information (e.g. Master Information Block (MIB), System Information Block Type 1 (SIB 1 )). For an SCell (including a Licensed-Assisted Access (LAA) SCell), Nm KB is configured by a RRC message dedicated to a UE 102. For PDSCH mapping, the available RE 691 may be the RE 691 whose index /fulfils /³/ds start and/or /data end³/ in a subframe.
[01 14] The OFDM access scheme with cyclic prefix (CP) may be employed, which may be also referred to as CP-OFDM. In the downlink, PDCCH, EPDCCH (Enhanced Physical Downlink Control Channel), PDSCH and the like may be transmitted. A radio frame may include a set of slots 683 (e.g., 10 slots for m=1 ). The RB is a unit for assigning downlink radio resources, defined by a predetermined bandwidth (RB bandwidth) and one slot. [01 15] A resource block is defined as NRB SC=12 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain and one slot (which consists of 14 symbols for normal CP and 12 symbols for extended CP) in the time domain.
[01 1 6] Carrier resource blocks are numbered from 0 to Nm KB-1 in the frequency domain for subcarrier spacing configuration m. The relation between the carrier resource block number nCRB in the frequency domain and resource elements (k,/) is given by nCRB =floor(k/NRB so) where k is defined relative to the resource grid. Physical resource blocks are defined within a carrier bandwidth part (BWP) and numbered from 0 to Nslze BWp, -1 where / is the number of the carrier bandwidth part. The relation between physical and absolute resource blocks in carrier bandwidth part / is given by ncRB = nPRB + Nstart BWP -1 , where Nstart B P is the carrier resource block where carrier bandwidth part starts. Virtual resource blocks are defined within a carrier bandwidth part and numbered from 0 to Nslze BWP ,--1 where / is the number of the carrier bandwidth part.
[01 1 7] A carrier bandwidth part is a contiguous set of physical resource blocks, selected from a contiguous subset of the carrier resource blocks for a given numerology m on a given carrier. The number of resource blocks Nslze Bwp,/ in a carrier BWP may fulfil Nhi'h,m RB <= Nslze BWP <= T^ Re,*. A UE can be configured with up to four carrier bandwidth parts in the downlink with a single downlink carrier bandwidth part being active at a given time. The UE is not expected to receive PDSCH or PDCCH outside an active bandwidth part. A UE can be configured with up to four carrier bandwidth parts in the uplink with a single uplink carrier bandwidth part being active at a given time. The UE shall not transmit PUSCH or PUCCH outside an active bandwidth part. [01 18] The RB may include twelve sub-carriers in frequency domain and one or more OFDM symbols in time domain. A region defined by one sub-carrier in frequency domain and one OFDM symbol in time domain is referred to as a resource element (RE) and is uniquely identified by the index pair (A,/^3) in the resource grid, where
Figure imgf000033_0001
are indices in the frequency and time domains, respectively. Moreover, RE is uniquely identified by the index pair (k,t) based on a certain reference point, where / are indices in the time domain. The reference point can be based on the resource grid, i.e. component carrier (CC) basis. Alternatively the reference point can be based on a certain band width part in the component carrier. While subframes in one CC are discussed herein, subframes are defined for each CC and subframes are substantially in synchronization with each other among CCs.
[01 19] In the uplink, in addition to CP-OFDM, a Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) access scheme may be employed, which is also referred to as Discrete Fourier Transform-Spreading OFDM (DFT-S-OFDM). In the uplink, PUCCH, PDSCH, Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) and the like may be transmitted.
[0120] For each numerology and carrier, a resource grid of
Figure imgf000033_0002
subcarriers and
Figure imgf000033_0003
OFDM symbols is defined, where Nmax,|i RB, is given by Table X4 and is DL or UL for downlink and uplink, respectively. There is one resource grid per antenna port p, per subcarrier spacing configuration m, and per transmission direction (downlink or uplink). Table X4
Figure imgf000034_0001
[0121] A UE 102 may be instructed to receive or transmit using a subset of the resource grid only. The set of resource blocks a UE is referred to as a carrier bandwidth part and may be configured to receive or transmit upon are numbered from 0 to Nm RB-1 in the frequency domain. The UE may be configured with one or more carrier bandwidth parts, each of which may have the same or different numerology.
[0122] Transmissions in multiple cells can be aggregated where up to fifteen secondary cells can be used in addition to the primary cell. A UE 102 configured for operation in bandwidth parts (BWPs) of a serving cell, is configured by higher layers for the serving cell a set of at most four bandwidth parts (BWPs) for receptions by the UE (DL BWP set) in a DL bandwidth by parameter DL-BWP-index and a set of at most four BWPs for transmissions by the UE 102 (UL BWP set) in an UL bandwidth by parameter UL-BWPHndex for the serving cell. For unpaired spectrum operation, a DL BWP from the set of configured DL BWPs is linked to an UL BWP from the set of configured UL BWPs, where the DL BWP and the UL BWP have a same index in the respective sets. For unpaired spectrum operation, a UE 102 can expect that the center frequency for a DL BWP is same as the center frequency for a UL BWP.
[0123] The Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) can be used to schedule DL transmissions on PDSCH and UL transmissions on PUSCH, where the Downlink Control Information (DCI) on PDCCH includes: Downlink assignments containing at least modulation and coding format, resource allocation, and HARQ information related to DL-SCH; and Uplink scheduling grants containing at least modulation and coding format, resource allocation, and HARQ information related to UL-SCH. In addition to scheduling, PDCCH can be used to for: Activation and deactivation of configured PUSCH transmission with configured grant; Activation and deactivation of PDSCH semi-persistent transmission; Notifying one or more UEs of the slot format; Notifying one or more UEs of the PRB(s) and OFDM symbol(s) where the UE may assume no transmission is intended for the UE; Transmission of TPC commands for PUCCH and PUSCH; Transmission of one or more TPC commands for SRS transmissions by one or more UEs; Switching a UE’s active bandwidth part; and Initiating a random access procedure.
[0124] One or more sets of PRB(s) may be configured for DL control channel monitoring. In other words, a control resource set is, in the frequency domain, a set of PRBs within which the UE 102 attempts to blindly decode downlink control information (i.e., monitor downlink control information (DCI)), where the PRBs may or may not be frequency contiguous, a UE 102 may have one or more control resource sets, and one DCI message may be located within one control resource set. In the frequency-domain, a PRB is the resource unit size (which may or may not include DMRS) for a control channel. A DL shared channel may start at a later OFDM symbol than the one(s) which carries the detected DL control channel. Alternatively, the DL shared channel may start at (or earlier than) an OFDM symbol than the last OFDM symbol which carries the detected DL control channel. In other words, dynamic reuse of at least part of resources in the control resource sets for data for the same or a different UE 102, at least in the frequency domain may be supported.
[0125] Namely, a UE 102 may have to monitor a set of PDCCH candidates in one or more control resource sets on one or more activated serving cells or bandwidth parts (BWPs) according to corresponding search spaces where monitoring implies decoding each PDCCH candidate according to the monitored DCI formats. Here, the PDCCH candidates may be candidates for which the PDCCH may possibly be assigned and/or transmitted. A PDCCH candidate is composed of one or more control channel elements (CCEs). The term “monitor” means that the UE 102 attempts to decode each PDCCH in the set of PDCCH candidates in accordance with all the DCI formats to be monitored.
[0126] The set of PDCCH candidates that the UE 102 monitors may be also referred to as a search space or a search space set. That is, the search space (or search space set) is a set of resource that may possibly be used for PDCCH transmission.
[0127] Furthermore, a common search space (CSS) and a user-equipment search space (USS) are set (or defined, configured). For example, the CSS may be used for transmission of PDCCH with DCI format(s) to a plurality of the UEs 102. That is, the CSS may be defined by a resource common to a plurality of the UEs 102. For example, the CSS is composed of CCEs having numbers that are predetermined between the gNB 160 and the UE 102. For example, the CSS is composed of CCEs having indices 0 to 15.
[0128] Here, the CSS may be used for transmission of PDCCH with DCI format(s) to a specific UE 102. That is, the gNB 160 may transmit, in the CSS, DCI format(s) intended for a plurality of the UEs 102 and/or DCI format(s) intended for a specific UE 102. There may be one or more types of CSS. For example, Type 0 PDCCH CSS may be defined for a DCI format scrambled by a System Information-Radio Network Temporary Identifier (SI-RNTI) on a primary cell (PCell). Type 1 PDCCH CSS may be defined for a DCI format scrambled by a Random Access- (RA-)RNTI. Additionally and/or alternatively, Type 1 PDCCH CSS may be used for a DCI format scrambled by a Temporary Cell- (TC-)RNTI or Cell- (C-)RNTI. Type 2 PDCCH CSS may be defined for a DCI format scrambled by a Paging- (P-)RNTI. Type 3 PDCCH CSS may be defined for a DCI format scrambled by an Interference- (INT-)RNTI, where if a UE 102 is configured by higher layers to decode a DCI format with CRC scrambled by the INT-RNTI and if the UE 102 detects the DCI format with CRC scrambled by the INT-RNTI, the UE 102 may assume that no transmission to the UE 102 is present in OFDM symbols and resource blocks indicated by the DCI format. Additionally and/or alternatively, Type 3 PDCCH CSS may be used for a DCI format scrambled by the other RNTI (e.g., Transmit Power Control- (TPC-)RNTI, Pre-emption Indication- (PI-)RNTI, Slot Format Indicator- (SFI-)RNTI, Semi persistent scheduling- (SPS-)RNTI, Grant free- (GF-)RNTI, Configured Scheduling- (CS-)RNTI, URLLC- (U-)RNTI), Autonomous Uplink- (AUL-) RNTI, Downlink Feedback Information- (DFI-) RNTI. [0129] A UE 102 may be indicated by System Information Block TypeO (SIB0), which is also referred to as MIB, a control resource set for TypeO-PDCCH common search space and a subcarrier spacing and a CP length for PDCCH reception. The TypeO-PDCCH common search space is defined by the CCE aggregation levels and the number of candidates per CCE aggregation level. The UE may assume that the DMRS antenna port associated with PDCCH reception in the TypeO-PDCCH common search space and the DMRS antenna port associated with Physical Broadcast channel (PBCH) reception are quasi-collocated with respect to delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average delay, and spatial Rx parameters. PBCH carries Master Information Block (MIB) which contains most important pieces of system information. A PDCCH with a certain DCI format in TypeO-PDCCH common search space schedules a reception of a PDSCH with SIB Typel (SIB 1 ) or with other SI messages. A UE may be indicated by SIB1 control resource set(s) for Typel -PDCCH common search space. A subcarrier spacing and a CP length for PDCCH reception with Typel -PDCCH common search space are same as for PDCCH reception with TypeO-PDCCH common search space. The UE may assume that the DMRS antenna port associated with PDCCH reception in the Typel -PDCCH common search space and the DMRS antenna port associated with PBCH reception are quasi-collocated with respect to delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average delay, and spatial Rx parameters. A monitoring periodicity of paging occasions for PDCCH in Type2~PDCCH common search space may be configured to the UE by higher layer parameter. A UE may be configured by higher layer signaling whether and/or which serving cell(s) to monitor Type3-PDCCH common search space. [0130] The USS may be used for transmission of PDCCH with DCI format(s) to a specific UE 102. That is, the USS is defined by a resource dedicated to a certain UE 102. That is, the USS may be defined independently for each UE 102. For example, the USS may be composed of CCEs having numbers that are determined based on a RNTI assigned by the gNB 1 60, a slot number in a radio frame, an aggregation level, or the like.
[0131] Here, the RNTI(s) may include C-RNTI (Cell-RNTI), Temporary C-RNTI. Also, the USS (the position(s) of the USS) may be configured by the gNB 160. For example, the gNB 160 may configure the USS by using the RRC message. That is, the base station may transmit, in the USS, DCI format(s) intended for a specific UE 102.
[0132] Here, the RNTI assigned to the UE 102 may be used for transmission of DCI (transmission of PDCCH). Specifically, CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) parity bits (also referred to simply as CRC), which are generated based on DCI (or DCI format), are attached to DCI, and, after attachment, the CRC parity bits are scrambled by the RNTI. The UE 102 may attempt to decode DCI to which the CRC parity bits scrambled by the RNTI are attached, and detects PDCCH (i.e., DCI, DCI format). That is, the UE 102 may decode PDCCH with the CRC scrambled by the RNTI.
[0133] When the control resource set spans multiple OFDM symbols, a control channel candidate may be mapped to multiple OFDM symbols or may be mapped to a single OFDM symbol. One DL control channel element may be mapped on REs defined by a single PRB and a single OFDM symbol. If more than one DL control channel elements are used for a single DL control channel transmission, DL control channel element aggregation may be performed. [0134] The number of aggregated DL control channel elements is referred to as DL control channel element aggregation level. The DL control channel element aggregation level may be 1 or 2 to the power of an integer. The gNB 160 may inform a UE 102 of which control channel candidates are mapped to each subset of OFDM symbols in the control resource set. If one DL control channel is mapped to a single OFDM symbol and does not span multiple OFDM symbols, the DL control channel element aggregation is performed within an OFDM symbol, namely multiple DL control channel elements within an OFDM symbol are aggregated. Otherwise, DL control channel elements in different OFDM symbols can be aggregated.
[0135] DCI formats may be classified into at least 4 types, DL regular (also referred to as DCI format 1_1 ), UL regular (also referred to as DCI format 0_1 ), DL fallback (also referred to as DCI format 1_0) and UL fallback (also referred to as DCI format 0_0) for PDSCH and PUSCH scheduling. In addition, there may be some other types for control signaling. Furthermore, some more types (e.g. DCI format 0_2, 0_3, 1_2 and 1_3) may be defined for scheduling of one or more PUSCH(s) and one or more PDSCH(s), which may be applicable to an NR-based unlicensed access (NR-U) cell. Table X5 shows an example of a set of the DCI format types.
Table X6
Figure imgf000040_0001
Figure imgf000041_0001
Figure imgf000042_0001
[0136] The DL regular DCI format and the UL regular DCI format may have a same DCI payload size. The DL fallback DCI format and the UL fallback DCI format may have a same DCI payload size. Table X6, X7, X8, and X9 show examples of DCI formats 0_0, 0_1 , 1_0 and 1_1 , respectively.“Mandatory” may mean the information field is always present irrespective of RRC (re)configuration. “Optional” may mean the information field may or may not be present depending on RRC (re)configuration. In the DL fallback DCI format and the UL fallback DCI format, all information fields are mandatory so that their DCI payload sizes are fixed irrespective of RRC (re)configuration.
Table X6
Figure imgf000042_0002
Figure imgf000043_0001
Figure imgf000044_0001
Table X7
Figure imgf000044_0002
Figure imgf000045_0001
Figure imgf000046_0001
Figure imgf000047_0001
Figure imgf000048_0002
Table X8
Figure imgf000048_0001
Figure imgf000049_0001
Figure imgf000050_0002
Table X9
Figure imgf000050_0001
Figure imgf000051_0001
Figure imgf000052_0001
Figure imgf000053_0001
Figure imgf000054_0001
Figure imgf000055_0002
[0137] Figure 7 shows examples of several numerologies. The numerology #1 (m=0) may be a basic numerology. For example, a RE of the basic numerology is defined with subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz in frequency domain and 2048KTS + CP length (e.g., 51 2KTS, 1 60KTS or 144KTS) in time domain, where Ts denotes a baseband sampling time unit defined as 1 /(15000*2048) seconds. For the m-th numerology, the subcarrier spacing may be equal to 15*2m and the effective OFDM symbol length NuTs =2048*2_iiKTs. It may cause the symbol length is 2048*2_mkT5 + CP length (e.g., 51 2*2 KTS, 160*2_tJKTs or 144*2~mkT5). Note that K=64,
Figure imgf000055_0001
other words, the subcarrier spacing of the m+1 -th numerology is a double of the one for the m-th numerology, and the symbol length of the m+1 -th numerology is a half of the one for the m-th numerology. Figure 7 shows four numerologies, but the system may support another number of numerologies.
[0138] Figure 8 shows a set of examples of subframe structures for the numerologies that are shown in Figure 7. These examples are based on the slot configuration set to 0. A slot includes 14 symbols, the slot length of the m+1 -th numerology is a half of the one for the m-th numerology, and eventually the number of slots in a subframe (i.e., 1 ms) becomes double. It may be noted that a radio frame may include 10 subframes, and the radio frame length may be equal to 10 ms.
[0139] Figure 9 shows another set of examples of subframe structures for the numerologies that are shown in Figure 7. These examples are based on the slot configuration set to 1. A slot includes 7 symbols, the slot length of the m+1 -th numerology is a half of the one for the m-th numerology, and eventually the number of slots in a subframe (i.e., 1 ms) becomes double.
[0140] A downlink physical channel may correspond to a set of resource elements carrying information originating from higher layers. The downlink physical channels may include Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH), Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH), Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH). A downlink physical signal corresponds to a set of resource elements used by the physical layer but might not carry information originating from higher layers. The downlink physical signals may include Demodulation reference signals (DM-RS), Phase-tracking reference signals (PT-RS), Channel-state information reference signal (CSI-RS) Primary synchronization signal (PSS), Secondary synchronization signal (SSS). [0141] An uplink physical channel may correspond to a set of resource elements carrying information originating from higher layers. The uplink physical channels may include Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH), Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH), Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH). An uplink physical signal is used by the physical layer but might not carry information originating from higher layers. The uplink physical signals may include Demodulation reference signals (DM-RS), Phase-tracking reference signals (PT-RS), Sounding reference signal (SRS).
[0142] The Synchronization Signal and PBCH block (SSB) may consist of primary and secondary synchronization signals (PSS, SSS), each occupying 1 symbol and 127 subcarriers, and PBCH spanning across 3 OFDM symbols and 240 subcarriers, but on one symbol leaving an unused part in the middle for SSS. For a regular NR operation, PSS and SSS may be located in different OFDM symbols in between one OFDM symbol gap, with PSS first, then SSS. The periodicity of the SSB can be configured by the network and the time locations where SSB can be sent are determined by sub-carrier spacing. Within the frequency span of a carrier, multiple SSBs can be transmitted. The physical cell identities (PCIs) of those SSBs may not have to be unique, i.e. different SSBs can have different PCIs. However, when an SSB is associated with an SIB1 (also known as remaining minimum system information (RMSI)), the SSB may correspond to an individual cell, which has a unique NR Cell Global Identifier (NCGI). Such an SSB may be referred to as a Cell-Defining SSB (CD-SSB). A PCell may be always associated to a CD-SSB located on the synchronization raster. [0143] Slot format indicator (SFI) may be defined to specify a format for one or more slot(s). With SFI, the UE 102 may be able to derive at least which symbols in a given slot that are ‘DL’ , ‘UL’ , and ‘unknown’ , respectively. In addition, it may also indicate which symbols in a given slot that are ‘reserved’ . With SFI, the UE 102 may also be able to derive the number of slots for which the SFI indicates their formats. SFI may be configured by dedicated RRC configuration message. Alternatively and/or additionally, SFI may be signaled by a group-common PDCCH (e.g., PDCCH with SFI-RNTI). Yet alternatively and/or additionally, SFI may be broadcasted via master information block (MIB) or remaining minimum system information (RMSI).
[0144] For example, each SFI can express up to 8 combinations of ‘DL’, ‘UL’ , ‘Unknown’ and ‘reserved’ , each combination includes N8|o*'m 5nitL pieces of symbol types. More specifically, given that
Figure imgf000058_0001
=14, one combination may be ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’
‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’ ‘Unknown’ . Another combination may be all ‘DL, that is ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’
‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ . Yet another combination may be all ‘UL, that is
‘UL’ ‘UL’ ‘UL’ ‘UL’ ‘UL’ ‘UL’ ‘UL’ ‘UL’ ‘UL’ ‘UL’ ‘UL’ ‘UL’ ‘UL’ ‘UL’ .
Yet another combination may be a combination of ‘DL’ , ‘UL’ and ‘Reserved’ such as ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘DL’ ‘Reserved’ ‘Reserved’
‘Reserved’ ‘Reserved’ ‘UL’ .
[0145] ‘DL’ symbols may be available for DL receptions and CSI/RRM measurements at the UE 102 side. ‘UL’ symbols may be available for UL transmissions at the UE 102 side. ‘Unknown’ resource may also be referred to as ‘Flexible’ and can be overridden by at least by DCI indication. ‘Unknown’ may be used to achieve the same as ‘Reserved’ if not overridden by DCI and/or SFI indication. On ‘Unknown’ symbols, UE 102 may be allowed to assume any DL and UL transmissions which are configured by higher-layer, unless overridden by DCI indicating the other direction, and any DL and UL transmissions indicated by DCI. For example, periodic CSI-RS, periodic CSHM, semi-persistently scheduled CSI-RS, periodic CSI reporting, semi-persistently scheduled CSI reporting, periodic SRS transmission, higher-layer configured Primary synchronization signal (PSS) / secondary SS (SSS) / PBCH can be assumed (i.e. for DL, assumed to be present and to be able to perform the reception, and for UL, assumed to be able to perform the transmission).
[0146] The overriding of ‘Unknown’ symbols by the DCI means that UE 102 may have to assume only DL and UL transmissions (PDSCH transmission, PUSCH transmission, aperiodic CSI-RS transmission, aperiodic CSHM resource, aperiodic SRS transmission) which are indicated by DCI indications. The overriding of ‘Unknown’ symbols by the SFI means that UE 102 may have to assume the symbols as either ‘DL’ , ‘UL’ , or ‘Reserved’ according to SFI indications. If the UE 102 assumes aperiodic CSI-RS transmission and/or aperiodic CSHM resource, the UE 102 may perform CSI and/or RRM measurement based on the aperiodic CSI-RS transmission and/or aperiodic CSHM resource. If the UE 102 does not assume aperiodic CSI-RS transmission and/or aperiodic CSHM resource, the UE 102 may not use the aperiodic CSI-RS transmission and/or aperiodic CSHM resource for CSI and/or RRM measurement.
[0147] The UE 102 may have to monitor PDCCH on some ‘DL’ or ‘Unknown’ symbols. There may be several options to monitor PDCCH. If all of the OFDM symbols which are assigned for a given control resource set (CORESET) are ‘DL’ , the UE 102 may assume all of the OFDM symbols are valid for monitoring of a PDCCH associated with the given CORESET. In this case, the UE 102 may assume each PDCCH candidate in the CORESET is mapped to all of the OFDM symbols for time-first RE group (REG)-to-control channel element (CCE) mapping. If all of the OFDM symbols which are assigned for a given CORESET are ‘Unknown’ , the UE 102 may assume all of the OFDM symbols are valid for monitoring of a PDCCH associated with the given CORESET. In this case, the UE 102 may assume each PDCCH candidate in the CORESET is mapped to all of the OFDM symbols for time-first REG-to-CCE mapping.
[0148] If every OFDM symbols which is assigned for a given combination of CORESET and search space set is either ‘UL’ or ‘Reserved’, the UE 102 may assume those OFDM symbols are not valid for monitoring of a PDCCH associated with the given combination of CORESET and search space set. If some of the OFDM symbols which are assigned for a given combination of CORESET and search space set are ‘DL’ and the others are ‘UL’ or ‘Reserved’ or if some of the OFDM symbols which are assigned for a given combination of CORESET and search space set are ‘Unknown’ and the others are ‘UL’ or ‘Reserved’, the UE 102 may not monitor PDCCH in the CORESET.
[0149] NR-U may not support RMSI and/ or dedicated RRC configuration of slot format. In this case, all symbols are considered to be Flexible as default.
[0150] Figure 10 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of a gNB 1060 (an example of the gNB 160). The gNB 1060 may include a higher layer processor 1001 (also referred to as higher layer processing circuitry), a DL transmitter 1002, a UL receiver 1003, and antennas 1004. The DL transmitter 1002 may include a PDCCH transmitter 1005 and a PDSCH transmitter 1006. The UL receiver 1003 may include a PUCCH receiver 1007 and a PUSCH receiver 1008. The higher layer processor 1001 may manage physical layer’s behaviors (the DL transmitter’s and the UL receiver’ s behaviors, LBT, etc) and provide higher layer parameters to the physical layer. The higher layer processor 1001 may obtain transport blocks from the physical layer. The higher layer processor 1001 may send/acquire higher layer messages such as a common and dedicated RRC messages and/or MAC messages to/from a UE’ s higher layer. The higher layer processor 1001 may also set and/or store higher layer parameters carried by the higher layer messages. The higher layer processor 1001 may provide the PDSCH transmitter 1006 transport blocks and provide the PDCCH transmitter 1005 transmission parameters related to the transport blocks. The UL receiver 1003 may receive multiplexed uplink physical channels and uplink physical signals via receiving antennas and de-multiplex them. The PUCCH receiver 1007 may provide the higher layer processor UCI. The PUSCH receiver 1008 may provide the higher layer processor 1001 received transport blocks. The UL receiver 1003 may also sense a downlink channel where the DL transmitter 1002 would perform downlink transmissions.
[0151] Figure 1 1 is a block diagram illustrating one implementation of a UE 1 102 (an example of the UE 102). The UE 1 102 may include a higher layer processor 1 1 1 1 , a UL transmitter 1 1 13, a DL receiver 1 1 12, and antennas 1 1 14. The UL transmitter 1 1 13 may include a PUCCH transmitter 1 1 17 and a PUSCH transmitter 1 1 18. The DL receiver 1 1 12 may include a PDCCH receiver 1 1 15 and a PDSCH receiver 1 1 16. The higher layer processor 1 1 1 1 may manage physical layer’ s behaviors (the UL transmitter’ s and the DL receiver’ s behaviors, LBT, etc) and provide higher layer parameters to the physical layer. The higher layer processor 1 1 1 1 may obtain transport blocks from the physical layer. The higher layer processor 1 1 1 1 may send/acquire higher layer messages such as a common and dedicated RRC messages and/or MAC messages to/from a UE’ s higher layer. The higher layer processor 1 1 1 1 may also set and/or store higher layer parameters carried by the higher layer messages. The higher layer processor 1 1 1 1 may provide the PUSCH transmitter transport blocks and provide the PUCCH transmitter 1 1 17 UCI. The DL receiver 1 1 12 may receive multiplexed downlink physical channels and downlink physical signals via receiving antennas and de-multiplex them. The PDCCH receiver 1 1 15 may provide the higher layer processor DCI. The PDSCH receiver 1 1 16 may provide the higher layer processor 1 1 1 1 received transport blocks. The DL receiver 1 1 12 may also sense an uplink channel where the UL transmitter 1 1 13 would perform uplink transmissions.
[0152] For downlink data transmission, the UE 1 102 may attempt blind decoding of one or more PDCCH (also referred to just as control channel) candidates. This procedure is also referred to as monitoring of PDCCH. The PDCCH may carry DCI format which schedules PDSCH (also referred to just as shared channel or data channel). The gNB 1060 may transmit PDCCH and the corresponding PDSCH in a downlink slot. Upon the detection of the PDCCH in a downlink slot, the UE 1 102 may receive the corresponding PDSCH in the downlink slot. Otherwise, the UE 1 102 may not perform PDSCH reception in the downlink slot.
[0153] Figure 12 illustrates an example of control resource unit and reference signal structure. A control resource set may be defined, in frequency domain, as a set of physical resource block(s) (PRBs). For example, a control resource set may include PRB#i to PRB#i+3 in frequency domain. The control resource set may also be defined, in time domain, as a set of OFDM symbol(s). It may also be referred to as a duration of the control resource set or just control resource set duration. For example, a control resource set may include three OFDM symbols, OFDM symbol#0 to OFDM symbol#2, in time domain. The UE 102 may monitor PDCCH in one or more control resource sets. The PRB set may be configured with respect to each control resource set through dedicated RRC signaling (e.g., via dedicated RRC reconfiguration). The control resource set duration may also be configured with respect to each control resource set through dedicated RRC signaling.
[0154] In the control resource unit and reference signal structure shown in Figure 12, control resource units are defined as a set of resource elements (REs). Each control resource unit includes all REs (i.e., 12 REs) within a single OFDM symbol and within a single PRB (i.e., consecutive 12 subcarriers). REs on which reference signals (RSs) are mapped may be counted as those REs, but the REs for RSs are not available for PDCCH transmission and the PDCCH are not mapped on the REs for RSs.
[0155] Multiple control resource units may be used for a transmission of a single PDCCH. In other words, one PDCCH may be mapped the REs which are included in multiple control resource units. Figure 12 shows the example that the UE 102 performing blind decoding of PDCCH candidates assuming that multiple control resource units located in the same frequency carries one PDCCH. The RSs for the
PDCCH demodulation may be contained in all of the resource units on which the PDCCH is mapped. The REs for the RS may not be available for either the PDCCH transmission or the corresponding PDSCH transmission.
[0156] Figure 13 illustrates an example of control channel and shared channel multiplexing. The starting and/or ending position(s) of PDSCH may be indicated via the scheduling PDCCH. More specifically, the DCI format which schedule PDSCH may include information field(s) for indicating the starting and/or ending position(s) of the scheduled PDSCH.
[0157] The UE 102 may include a higher layer processor which is configured to acquire a common and/or dedicated higher layer message. The common and/or dedicated higher layer message may include system information and/or information for higher layer configuration/reconfiguration. Based on the system information and/or higher layer configuration, the UE 102 performs physical layer reception and/or transmission procedures. The UE 102 may also include PDCCH receiving circuitry which is configured to monitor a PDCCH. The PDCCH may carry a DCI format which schedule a PDSCH. Additionally and/or alternatively the PDCCH may carry a DCI format which schedule a PUSCH. The UE 102 may also include PDSCH receiving circuitry which is configured to receive the PDSCH upon the detection of the corresponding PDCCH. The UE 102 may also include PUCCH transmitting circuitry which is configured to transmit the PUCCH carrying HARQ-ACK feedback related to the PDSCH. Additionally and/or alternatively the UE 102 may also include PUSCH transmitting circuitry which is configured to transmit the PUSCH upon the detection of the corresponding PDCCH.
[0158] The gNB 160 may include a higher layer processor which is configured to send a common and/or dedicated higher layer message. The common and/or dedicated higher layer message may include system information and/or information for higher layer configuration/reconfiguration. Based on the system information and/or higher layer configuration, the gNB 160 performs physical layer reception and/or transmission procedures. The gNB 160 may also include PDCCH transmitting circuitry which is configured to transmit a PDCCH. The PDCCH may carry DCI format which schedule a PDSCH. Additionally and/or alternatively, the PDCCH may carry DCI format which schedule a PUSCH. The gNB 160 may also include PDSCH transmitting circuitry which is configured to transmit the PDSCH upon the transmission of the corresponding PDCCH. The gNB 160 may also include PUCCH receiving circuitry which is configured to receive the PUCCH carrying HARQ-ACK feedback related to the PDSCH. Additionally and/or alternatively the gNB 160 may also include PUSCH receiving circuitry which is configured to receive the PUSCH upon the detection of the corresponding PDCCH.
[0159] UE 102 may monitor PDCCH candidates in a control resource set. The set of PDCCH candidates may be also referred to as search space. The control resource set may be defined by a PRB set in frequency domain and a duration in units of OFDM symbol in time domain.
[0160] For each serving cell, higher layer signaling such as common RRC messages or UE dedicated RRC messages may configure the UE 102 with one or more PRB set(s) for PDCCH monitoring. For each serving cell, higher layer signaling such as common RRC messages or UE dedicated RRC messages may also configure the UE 102 with the control resource set duration for PDCCH monitoring.
[0161] For each serving cell, higher layer signaling configures a UE with A* control resource sets. For control resource set p , 0 p<,P, the configuration includes: a first symbol index provided by higher layer parameter CORESET-start-symb; the number of consecutive symbols provided by higher layer parameter CORESET-time-duration; a set of resource blocks provided by higher layer parameter CORESET-freq-dom; a CCE-to-REG mapping provided by higher layer parameter CORESET-trans-type (also referred to as CORESET-CCE-to-REG-mapping); a REG bundle size, in case of interleaved CCE-to-REG mapping, provided by higher layer parameter CORESET-REG-bundle-size; and antenna port quasi-collocation provided by higher layer parameter CORESET-TCI-StateRefld. If the UE is not configured with higher layer parameter CORESET-TCI-StateRefld, the UE may assume that the DMRS antenna port associated with PDCCH reception in the USS and the DMRS antenna port associated with PBCH reception are quasi-collocated with respect to delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average delay, and spatial Rx parameters.
[0162] For each serving cell and for each DCI format with CRC scrambled by C-RNTI, SPS-RNTI and/or grant-free RNTI that a UE is configured to monitor PDCCH, the UE is configured with associations to control resource sets. The associations may include associations to a set of control resource sets by higher layer parameter DCI-to-CORESET-map. For each control resource set in the set of control resource sets, the associations may include: the number of PDCCH candidates per CCE aggregation level L by higher layer parameter CORESET-candidates-DCI; a PDCCH monitoring periodicity of kp slots by higher layer parameter CORESET-monitor-period-DCI; a PDCCH monitoring offset of op slots, where 0<=op<kp, by higher layer parameter CORESET-monitor-offset-DCI; and a PDCCH monitoring pattern within a slot, indicating first symbol(s) of the control resource set within a slot for PDCCH monitoring, by higher layer parameter CORESET-monitor-DCI-symbolPattern. The UE 102 may assume that non-slot based scheduling is configured in addition to slot-based scheduling, if the UE 102 is configured with higher layer parameter CORESET-monitor-DCI-symbolPattern. The UE 102 may assume that non-slot based scheduling is not configured but slot-based scheduling only, if the UE 102 is not configured with higher layer parameter CORESET-monitor-DCI-symbolPattern.
[0163] Figure 14 illustrates PDCCH monitoring occasions for slot-based scheduling (also referred to as Type A resource allocation). PDCCH monitoring occasions may be OFDM symbols on which the PDCCH monitoring is configured by a search space configuration. A search space set may be identified for a combination of a control resource set, a DCI format (or DCI format group including DCI format having a same DCI payload size). In the example shown in Figure 16, two search space sets are seen, search space set #0 and #1. Both search space set #0 and #1 are associated with a same CORESET. The configuration of the CORESET such as CORESET-start-symb, CORESET-time-duration, CORESET-freq-dom, CORESET-trans-type, CORESET-REG-bundle-size, CORESET-TCI-StateRefld apply to both search space set #0 and #1. For example, CORESET-time-duration set to 3 symbols applies to both of them. Search space set #0 may be associated with a certain DCI format (e.g., DCI format 1 , fallback DCI format), and search space set #1 may be associated with another certain DCI format (e.g., DCI format 2, regular DCI format). The higher layer parameter CORESET-monitor-period-DCI is set to 2 slots for search space set #0, while the higher layer parameter CORESET-monitor-period-DCI is set to 1 slot for search space set #1. Therefore, DCI format 1 may be potentially transmitted and/or monitored in every 2 slot, while DCI format 2 may be potentially transmitted and/or monitored in every slot.
[0164] Figure 15 illustrates PDCCH monitoring occasions for non-slot-based scheduling. In the example shown in Figure 1 5, two search space sets are seen, search space set #2 and #3. Both search space set #2 and #3 are associated with a same CORESET. This CORESET may or may not be the same CORESET as in Figure 15. The higher layer parameters CORESET-monitor-period-DCI for both search space set #2 and #3 are set to 1 slot.
[0165] In addition, the higher layer parameters
CORESET-monitor-DCI-symbolPattern are individually configured to search space set #2 and #3. The higher layer parameter CORESET-monitor-DCI-symbolPattern may indicate, using a bitmap scheme, OFDM symbol(s) on which PDCCH is monitored. To be more specific, the higher layer parameter CORESET-monitor-DCI-symbolPattern per search space set may include 14 bits, the 1 st bit to 14th bit which correspond to OFDM symbol #0 to #13, respectively. Each of the bits indicates whether or not PDCCH is monitored on the corresponding OFDM symbol (e.g.,“0” indicates no PDCCH monitoring and “1” indicates PDCCH monitoring, or vice versa). In this example, the higher layer parameters CORESET-monitor-DCI-symbolPattern for search space set #2 indicates OFDM symbols #0 and #7 for PDCCH monitoring, which the higher layer parameters CORESET-monitor-DCI-symbolPattern for search space set #3 indicates OFDM symbols #0, #2, #4, #6, #8, #10, #12 for PDCCH monitoring. It is noted that these
PDCCH monitoring applies to the slot that is specified by
CORESET-monitor-period-DCI and CORESET-monitor-offset-DCI. [0166] A control-channel element may include 6 resource-element groups (REGs) where a resource-element group equals one resource block during one OFDM symbol. Resource-element groups within a control-resource set may be numbered in increasing order in a time-first manner, starting with 0 for the first OFDM symbol and the lowest-numbered resource block in the control resource set. A UE can be configured with multiple control-resource sets. Each control-resource set may be associated with one CCE-to-REG mapping only. The CCE-to-REG mapping for a control-resource set can be interleaved or non-interleaved, configured by the higher-layer parameter CORESET-CCE-REG-mapping-type. The REG bundle size is configured by the higher-layer parameter CORESET-REG-bundle-size. For non-interleaved CCE-to-REG mapping, the REG bundle size is 6. For interleaved CCE-to-REG mapping, the REG bundle size is either 2 or 6 for a CORESET with CORESET-time-duration set to 1 , and the REG bundle size is either NC0RESET symb or 6 for a CORESET with CORESET-time-duration NC0RESET symb set to greater than 1. The UE may assume: the same precoding in the frequency domain being used within a REG bundle if the higher-layer parameter CORESET-precoder-granularity equals CORESET-REG-bundle-size; and the same precoding in the frequency domain being used across within contiguous RBs in CORESET if the higher-layer parameter CORESET-precoder-granularity equals the number of contiguous RBs in the frequency domain within CORESET.
[0167] Each control resource set includes a set of CCEs numbered from 0 to NccE,p,kp ~1 where NCcE,p,kP is the number of CCEs in control resource set p in monitoring period kp. The sets of PDCCH candidates that a UE monitors are defined in terms of PDCCH UE-specific search spaces. A PDCCH UE-specific search space S(L) kp at CCE aggregation level L is defined by a set of PDCCH candidates for CCE aggregation level L. L can be one of 1 , 2, 4, and 8.
[0168] PDSCH and/or PUSCH RE mapping may be affected by higher layer signaling and/or layer-1 signaling such as a PDCCH with a DCI format 1 and 2. For PDSCH, modulated complex-valued symbols may be mapped in REs which meet all of the following criteria: they are in the resource blocks assigned for transmission; they are declared as available for PDSCH according to rate matching resource set configuration and/or indication; they are not used for CSI-RS; they are not used for Phase Tracking RS (PT-RS); they are not reserved for SS/PBCH; they are not declared as ‘reserved’ .
[0169] To decode PDSCH according to a detected PDCCH, a UE may be configured with any of higher layer parameters: rate-match- PDSCH-resource-set including one or multiple reserved pairs of RBs (higher layer parameter rate-match-PDSCH-resource-RBs which is also referred to as bitmap-1 ) and reserved symbols (higher layer parameters rate-match-PDSCH-resource-symbols which is also referred to as bitmap-2) for which the reserved RBs apply; rate-match-resources-v-shift including LTE-CRS-vshift(s); rate-match-resources-antenna-port including LTE-CRS antenna ports 1 , 2 or 4 ports; rate-match-CORESET including CORESET-ID(s) of CORESET configured to a UE 102 for monitoring. The UE 102 may have to determine the PDSCH RE mapping according to the union of provided rate-matching configurations. To decode PDSCH a UE 102 rate-matches around the REs corresponding to detected PDCCH that scheduled the PDSCH. A UE 102 may not be expected to handle the case where PDSCH DMRS REs are over-lapping, even partially, with any RE(s) indicated by the rate-matching configuration rate-match-PDSCH-resource-set and rate-match-resources-v-shift and rate-match-resources-antenna-port and rate-match-CORESET.
[0170] If a UE 102 receives a PDSCH without receiving a corresponding PDCCH, or if the UE 102 receives a PDCCH indicating a SPS PDSCH release, the UE 102 may generate one corresponding HARQ-ACK information bit. If a UE 102 is not provided higher layer parameter PDSCH-CodeB/ockGroup Transmission, the UE 102 may generate one HARQ-ACK information bit per transport block. A UE 102 is not expected to be indicated to transmit HARQ-ACK information for more than two SPS PDSCH receptions in a same PUCCH. For each physical cell group, UE 102 may be configured with higher layer parameter pdsch~HARQ-ACK~Codebook which indicates PDSCH HARQ-ACK codebook type. The PDSCH HARQ-ACK codebook may be either semi-static (also referred to as Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook) or dynamic (also referred to as Type-2 HARQ-ACK codebook). This may be applicable to both CA and none CA operation and may correspond to L1 parameter ’HARQ-ACK-codebook’.
[0171] A UE 102 may report HARQ-ACK information for a corresponding PDSCH reception or SPS PDSCH release only in a HARQ-ACK codebook that the UE transmits in a slot indicated by a value of a PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field in a corresponding DCI format (e.g. DCI format 1_0 or DCI format 1 _1 ). If the UE 102 receives the PDCCH or SPS PDSCH release successfully, a value of the corresponding HARQ-ACK information bit may be basically set to ACK. If the UE 102 does not receive the PDCCH or SPS PDSCH release successfully (i.e. fails to receive it), the value of the corresponding HARQ-ACK information bit may be basically set to NACK. The UE 102 may report NACK value(s) for HARQ-ACK information bit(s) in a HARQ-ACK codebook that the UE transmits in a slot not indicated by a value of a PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field in a corresponding DCI format (e.g. DCI format 1_0 or DCI format 1_1 ). If the UE 102 is provided higher layer parameter pdsch-AggregationFactor, iVpjgj, is a value of pdsch-AggregationFactor, otherwise,
Figure imgf000072_0001
= 1 . The UE102 may report
HARQ-ACK information only for a last slot of the
Figure imgf000072_0002
slots.
[0172] If a UE reports HARQ-ACK information in a PUSCH or a PUCCH only for a SPS PDSCH release or only for a PDSCH reception within t e MA c occasions for candidate PDSCH receptions that is scheduled by DCI format 1_0 with a counter DAI field value of 1 on the PCell, the UE may determine a HARQ-ACK codebook only for the SPS PDSCH release or only the PDSCH reception., e.g. one-bit HARQ-ACK codebook. Otherwise, the HARQ-ACK codebook may be more than one bit.
[01 73] In some cases, a HARQ-ACK information bit may be automatically set to a fixed value (e.g. NACK, or ACK) without referring to PDSCH reception or SPS PDSCH release reception. For example, if the UE is configured with pdsch-HARQ-ACK-Codebook - semi-static , the UE 102 may report NACK value(s) for HARQ-ACK information bit(s) in a HARQ-ACK codebook that the UE transmits in a slot not indicated by a value of a PDSCH -to~HARQ_feedback timing indicator field in a corresponding DCI format (e.g. DCI format 1_0 or DCI format 1_1 ).
[01 74] Another case where HARQ-ACK information bit may be automatically set to a fixed value (e.g. NACK, or ACK) without referring to PDSCH reception or SPS PDSCH release reception is that, if an occasion for a candidate PDSCH reception can be in response to a PDCCH with a DCI format (e.g. DCI format 1 _1 ) and if higher layer parameter maxNrofCodeWordsSchedu!edByDCI indicates reception of two transport blocks, when the UE receives a PDSCH with one transport block, the HARQ-ACK information is associated with the first transport block and the UE 102 may generate a NACK for the second transport block if higher layer parameter harq-ACK-SpatialBundlingPUCCH is not provided and may generate HARQ-ACK information with value of ACK for the second transport block if higher layer parameter harq-A CKSpatialBundlingPUCCH is provided.
[0175] Yet another case where HARQ-ACK information bit may be automatically set to a fixed value (e.g. NACK, or ACK) without referring to PDSCH reception or SPS PDSCH release reception is that, if the UE 102 is configured by higher layer parameter maxNrofCodeWordsScheduhdByDCI with reception of two transport blocks for the active DL BWP of serving cell c, and if the UE 102 receives one transport block, the UE 102 may assume ACK for the second transport block.
[0176] Yet another case where HARQ-ACK information bit may be automatically set to a fixed value (e.g. NACK, or ACK) without referring to PDSCH reception or SPS PDSCH release reception is that the UE 102 may set to NACK value in the HARQ-ACK codebook any HARQ-ACK information corresponding to PDSCH reception or SPS PDSCH release scheduled by DCI format (e.g. DCI format 1_0 or DCI format 1_1 ) that the UE 102 detects in a PDCCH monitoring occasion that is after a PDCCH monitoring occasion where the UE detects a DCI format (e.g. DCI format 1_0 or DCI format 1_1 ) scheduling the PUSCH transmission.
[01 77] NR may support code block group based transmission(s) for PDSCH and
PUSCH. If the UE 102 is provided higher layer parameter
PDSCH-CodeBhckGroupTransmission for a serving cell, the UE 102 may receive PDSCHs that include code block groups (CBGs) of a transport block and the UE 102 may be provided higher layer parameter maxCodeBlockGroupsPerTransportBlock indicating a maximum number JVHQ B'ACK °f CBGs for generating respective HARQ-ACK information bits for a transport block reception for the serving cell, where for the number of C code blocks (CBs) in a transport block, the UE 102 may determine the number of CBGs as
Figure imgf000074_0001
[0178] For CBG-based PDSCH reception, if the UE 102 successfully decodes all CGs in a given CBG of a TB, a value of the HARQ-ACK information bit corresponding the CBG may be basically set to ACK. If the UE 102 does not successfully decode (i.e. fails to decode) at least one CG in the given CBG of the TB, a value of the HARQ-ACK information bit corresponding the CBG may be basically set to NACK. In addition, in some cases, a HARQ-ACK information bit for a given CBG may be automatically set to a fixed value (e.g. NACK, or ACK) without referring to the reception of the associated CB(s).
[0179] For example, the HARQ-ACK codebook includes the A^SRQ^ACK HARQ-ACK information bits and, if
Figure imgf000074_0002
a transport block, the
UE 102 may generate a NACK value for the last
Figure imgf000074_0003
HARQ-ACK information bits for the transport block in the HARQ-ACK codebook.
[0180] In another case where a HARQ-ACK information bit for a CBG is automatically set to ACK without referring to the reception of the associated CB(s) is that, if the UE 102 generates a HARQ-ACK codebook in response to a retransmission of a transport block, corresponding to a same HARQ process as a previous transmission of the transport block, the UE 102 may generate an ACK for each CBG that the UE 102 correctly decoded in a previous transmission of the transport block.
[0181] Yet another case where a HARQ-ACK information bit for a CBG is automatically set to a certain value without referring to the reception of the associated CB(s) is that if the UE 102 receives a PDSCH that is scheduled by a PDCCH with DCI format (e.g. DCI format 1_0), or a SPS PDSCH, or the UE detects a SPS PDSCH release, and if the UE is configured with higher layer parameter pdsch-HARQ-ACK-Codebook = semi-static, the UE may repeat
Figure imgf000075_0001
times the HARQ-ACK information for the transport block in the PDSCH or for the SPS PDSCH release, respectively, for generating A^RQ^ACK HARQ-ACK information bits.
[0182] The 5G NR system may be operated licensed spectrum which is owned by cellular operators. Additionally and/or alternatively the 5G NR system may be operated in unlicensed spectrum as a complementary tool for the operators to augment their service offering. NR-based unlicensed access (NR-U) may be applicable to below 6 GHz and above 6GHz unlicensed bands (e.g., 5GHz, 37GHz, 60GHz). NR-U cell may be operated in TDD bands with either an LTE-based anchor cell or an NR-based anchor cell (i.e. standalone NR cell). Furthermore, standalone operation of NR-U in unlicensed spectrum may also be possible.
[0183] In order to ensure a fair co-existence with another NR-U node and/or another radio access technology (RAT) node such as wireless LAN node, the gNB 160 and/or the UE 102 may have to perform Listen Before Talk (LBT) procedure before their transmissions. LBT procedure is also referred to as Channel Access procedure. There may be several types of Channel Access (CA) procedures.
[0184] Figure 16 shows the first type of Channel Access procedure. The first type of Channel Access procedure may be used for downlink transmission(s) including PDSCH and PDCCH. The gNB 160 may transmit a transmission including PDSCH and PDCCH on a carrier on which NR-U cell(s) transmission(s) are performed, after first sensing the channel to be idle during the CA slot durations of a defer duration Td \ and after the counter N is zero in step 4. The counter N is adjusted by sensing the channel for additional CA slot duration(s) according to the Step S1 to step S6. In Step S1 , the gNB 160 may set N = Ninit , where Ninil is a random number uniformly distributed between 0 and CW , and go to Step S4. In
Step S2, if N > 0 and the gNB 160 chooses to decrement the counter, the gNB 160 may set N = N - 1. In Step S3, the gNB 160 may sense the channel for an additional CA slot duration, and if the additional CA slot duration is idle, go to Step S4, otherwise go to Step S5. In Step S4, if N = 0 , the gNB 160 may stop, otherwise go to Step S2. In Step S5, the gNB 160 may sense the channel until either a busy CA slot is detected within an additional defer duration Td or all the CA slots of the additional defer duration Td are detected to be idle. In Step S6, if the channel is sensed to be idle during all the CA slot durations of the additional defer duration Td , the gNB 160 may go to Step S4, otherwise go to Step S5.
[0185] Figure 17 shows an example of deferment of transmission. If the gNB 160 has not transmitted a transmission including PDSCH/PDCCH on a carrier on which NR-U cell(s) transmission(s) are performed after Step S4 in this procedure, the gNB 160 may transmit a transmission including PDSCH/PDCCH on the carrier, if the channel is sensed to be idle at least in a CA slot duration Ts, when the gNB 160 is ready to transmit PDSCH/PDCCH and if the channel has been sensed to be idle during all the CA slot durations of a defer duration Td immediately before this transmission. If the channel has not been sensed to be idle in a s CA lot duration Tsl when the gNB 160 first senses the channel after it is ready to transmit or if the channel has been sensed to be not idle during any of the CA slot durations of a defer duration Td immediately before this intended transmission, the gNB 160 may proceed to Step S1 after sensing the channel to be idle during the CA slot durations of a defer duration Td . The defer duration Td may consist of duration Tf = 16us immediately followed by mp consecutive CA slot durations where each slot duration is Ts, = 9 us , and Tf includes an idle CA slot duration Tsl at start of Tf . A slot duration Tsl may be considered to be idle if the gNB 160 senses the channel during the CA slot duration, and the power detected by the gNB 160 for at least 4us within the CA slot duration is less than energy detection threshold xhresh. Otherwise, the CA slot duration Tsl may be considered to be busy. By using the above-described transmission deferment, more than one cells of which locations are geometrically separated may be able to obtain channel access successfully at the same time, and therefore frequency reuse among the cells can be achieved.
[0186] CWminp £ CWp £ CJTmax p is the contention window. CWp adjustment may be performed by the gNB 160. CWmin and CWniax p may be chosen before Step S1 of the above-described procedure. mp, CWmin p, and CWmax p may be derived based on channel access priority class associated with the gNB transmission.
[0187] Figure 18 shows an example of channel access priority class for downlink transmission(s). In this example, there are 4 classes, and lower index may correspond to higher priority. For each class, a parameter set for the channel access procedure is defined. The parameter set for class p may include mp , CWminp ,
Figure imgf000078_0001
, and allowed CWp sizes, where Tmcot is referred to as maximum channel occupancy time (MOOT). The gNB 160 getting channel access with priority class p may not be allowed to continuously transmit on the carrier on which NR-U cell(s) transmission(s) are performed, for a period exceeding Tmcot p .
[0188] Similarly, the UE 102 may use the first type of Channel Access procedure for uplink transmission(s) including PUSCH and/or PUCCH. The above-described Channel access procedure including Step S1 to Step S6 may be used with “gNB 160” replaced by “UE102”, with “PDSCH/PDCCH” replaced by “PUSCH/PUCCH/SRS”, and with uplink channel access priority class. Figure 19 shows an example of channel access priority class for uplink transmission(s). When the first type of Channel Access procedure is used for uplink transmission, it may also be referred to as Type-1 UL Channel Access procedure.
[0189] Figure 20 shows the second type of Channel Access procedure. The second type of Channel Access procedure may be used for downlink transmission(s) including discovery signal transmission(s) and not including PDSCH. The discovery signal may include SS/PBCH(s), CSI-RS(s) and/or control resource set(s). The second type of Channel Access procedure may make the channel access easier than the first type, since the discovery signal may not occupy a long transmission duration compared with a PDSCH transmission. An gNB 1 60 may transmit a transmission including discovery signal but not including PDSCH on a carrier on which NR-U cell(s) transmission(s) are performed immediately after sensing the channel to be idle for at least a sensing interval Tiis = 25 us and if the duration of the transmission is less than 1 ms. Tdrs may consist of a duration Tf = \ 6us immediately followed by one CA slot duration Tsl - 9 us and Tf includes an idle CA slot duration Ts, at start of Tf . The channel is considered to be idle for Tdrs if it is sensed to be idle during the slot durations of rdrs .
[0190] Figure 21 shows the third type of Channel Access procedure. Channel sensing scheme of the third type of Channel Access procedure is almost the same as of the second type of Channel Access procedure. The third type of Channel Access procedure may be used for uplink transmission(s) which is to be transmitted inside of COT obtained by the first type channel access procedure at the gNB 160 side. In the example, the gNB 160 performs the first type channel access procedure right before a Common Control-PDCCH (CC-PDCCH) transmission. CC-PDCCH may also be referred to as PDCCH with CRC scrambled by common control-RNTI (CC-RNTI). In a DCI format carried by the CC-PDCCH may include several bit fields including bit field(s) for indicating“UL offset” and“UL duration”. If UL offset /and duration d are indicated by the CC-PDCCH for subframe n, the UE 102 is not required to receive any downlink physical channels and/or physical signals in slot(s) rfrfr-i with F0, 1 , .., d~\ , and those slot(s) may have to be covered by the MCOT which was obtained by the channel access for the CC-PDCCH transmission at gNB 160 side. If the UE uses Type 2 channel access procedure for a transmission including PUSCH, the UE may be allowed to transmit the transmission including PUSCH immediately after sensing the channel to be idle for at least a sensing interval
^short ui = 25^5·. 7^hort ul consists of a duration Tf = \6us immediately followed by one CA slot duration Tsl = 9 us and Tf includes an idle CA slot duration 7^ at start of Tj . The channel is considered to be idle for rshort ul if it is sensed to be idle during the CA slot durations of Tshort ul . The first type of Channel Access procedure may also be referred to as Type-2 UL Channel Access procedure. Note that the other type of PDCCH (e.g. PDCCH with DCI format 0_0, 0J , 0.2, 0.3, 1.0, 1.1 , 1.2, 1.3) for slot n may also indicate“UL offset” and“UL duration”. In this case, the UE may also be allowed to use the third type of Channel Access procedure, if configured.
[0191] Figure 22 shows the fourth type of Channel Access procedure. Channel sensing scheme of the fourth type of Channel Access procedure is almost the same as of the second and third types of Channel Access procedure. The fourth type of Channel Access procedure may be used for downlink transmission(s) which includes PUSCH but does not include PDSCH and is to be transmitted inside of COT obtained by the first type channel access procedure at the UE 102 side. If a PUSCH transmission indicates COT sharing, an gNB 160 may be allowed to transmit a transmission including PDCCH but not including PDSCH on the same carrier immediately after sensing the channel to be idle for at least a sensing interval Tpdcch = 25MS , if the duration of the PDCCH is less than or equal to two OFDM symbols length and it shall contain at least Downlink Feedback Information (DFI) or UL grant to the UE from which the PUSCH transmission indicating COT sharing was received. Tpdcch consists of a duration Tf = \6us immediately followed by one slot duration Tsl = 9us and ^ includes an idle slot duration Tsl at start of Tf . The channel is considered to be idle for rpdcch if it is sensed to be idle during the slot durations of T pdcch '
[0192] In order to avoid collisions with transmissions from other nodes, contention window (CW) size may change depending on how many times collisions occur or equivalent. If a collision is observed at a node, the node may have to increase the CW size. If any collision is not observed, the node may be allowed to reduce the CW size. Figure 23 shows an example of CW size adjustment. This example assumes that the number of available CW size is 7, i.e. CW#0 to CW#6. If a collision is observed, CW size is increased to the CW size with the next higher index, except for the CWmax in which case the CW size is kept as CWmax. If any collision is not observed, the CW size may fallback to CWmin irrespective of the previous CW size.
[0193] A possible metric for the gNB’ s decision on whether or not the collision occurs for PDSCH may be HARQ-ACK feedback from the UE 102. Another possible metric for the gNB’ s decision on whether or not the collision occurs in PDCCH may be PUSCH from the UE 102. For uplink, a possible metric for the UE’ s decision on whether or not the collision occurs for PUSCH may be whether or not uplink retransmission is requested.
[0194] Figure 40 shows an example of LBT for a transmission with a directional beam. The gNB 160 may perform transmission beam sweeping with multiple narrow Tx beams (e.g. Tx beam#1 , #2 and #3). Immediately before a signal transmission with any Tx beam, the gNB 160 may have to perform LBT. In this example, the gNB 160 performs channel sensing by using a wider beam (Rx beam #0) in horizontal plane (e.g. omni-directional Rx beam). The LBT parameters (counter, CWS, channel access class, COT, and so on) may be managed per node. For example, counter and CWS may be managed per node. In this case, once the counter reaches zero, the gNB 160 may be allowed to perform transmission with any of the Tx beams, and a single CWS is maintained with referring to collisions (e.g. NACKs) on all of the Tx beams.
[0195] Additionally and/or alternatively, some linkage from Tx beam used for a transmission to Rx beam used for channel sensing for the transmission, or vice versa, may be defined. For example, each of the Tx beam #1 , #2 and #3 corresponds to the Rx beam #0. In this case, the LBT parameters may be managed per Rx beam. For example, counter and CWS may be managed per node. Once the counter for a given Rx beam reaches zero, the gNB 160 may be allowed to perform transmission with any of the Tx beams which are linked to the given Rx beam, and a single CWS for the given Rx beam is maintained with referring to collisions on all of the Tx beams which are linked to the given Rx beam. COT may be figured per Rx beam. Within the COT for a given Rx beam, the gNB 160 may be allowed, subject to Cat-1 or Cat-2 LBT, to perform transmissions using any of the Tx beams which correspond to the given Rx beam. Alternatively, either the counter or the CWS may be managed per Rx beam while the other one may be managed per node. For example, the counter is managed per Rx beam, and once the counter reaches zero, the gNB 160 may be allowed to perform a transmission with any of the Tx beams which are linked to the Rx beam. On the other hand, collisions on all of Tx beams (including Tx beam #1 , #2 and #3 and any other beams of the gNB160) may be considered for CWS adjustment for the Rx beam #0.
[0196] Cat-1 LBT is a channel access procedure without channel sensing. Cat~2 LBT is a channel access procedure with one shot channel sensing. Cat-2 LBT may also be referred to as Type-2 channel access procedure. Cat-1 and Cat-2 LBTs may be allowed only inside COT. Cat-3 LBT is a channel access procedure with random backoff with a fixed CW side. Cat-4 LBT is a channel access procedure with random backoff with an adaptive CW side. Cat-4 LBT may also be referred to as Type-1 channel access procedure.
[0197] Tx beams may correspond to some physical channels or physical signals. For example, each Tx beam may correspond to a respective source of quasi-co-location (QCL) assumption. The sources of QCL assumption may include SS/PBCH, CSI-RS, PT-RS, NR-U discovery signal/channel which may comprise SS/PBCH, and the like. Therefore, it is noted that the above-described“Tx beam” can be interpreted as the corresponding physical channel or physical signal. Alternatively and/or additionally, the Tx beam may correspond to some transmission antenna configuration, e.g. a weight vector for a transmission antenna array. In this case, the above-described “Tx beam” can be interpreted as the corresponding antenna configuration. Similarly, the Rx beam may correspond to some reception antenna configuration, e.g. a weight vector for a reception antenna array. In this case, the above-described“Rx beam” can be interpreted as the corresponding antenna configuration.
[0198] If beam forming gain for channel sensing is different from one for the corresponding transmission, threshold for the channel sensing may need to be adjusted. For example, the antenna gain ratio between Rx antenna configuration and Tx antenna configuration for a given direction (e.g. the direction to the target UE, the center direction of the Tx beam main lobe, the direction of the peak of the Tx beam main lobe) may be used for the threshold adjustment. More specifically, if the antenna gain of the center direction of Tx beam #1 is 20 dBi and the antenna gain of the same direction of Rx beam #0 (which is linked from the Tx beam #1 ) is 2 dBi, the threshold value for the channel sensing using the Rx beam #0 may be decreased with 18 dB, compared with a non-directional transmission case.
[0199] Figure 41 shows an example of LBT for a transmission with a directional beam. The gNB 160 may be able to use multiple narrow Tx beams (e.g. Tx beam#1 , #2 and #3) for transmissions as well as multiple narrow Rx beams (e.g. Rx beam#1 , #2 and #3) for receptions. Immediately before a signal transmission with any Tx beam, the gNB 160 may have to perform LBT. Some linkage (e.g. 1— to— 1 mapping) from Tx beam used for a transmission to Rx beam used for channel sensing for the transmission, or vice versa, may be defined. For example, the Tx beam #1 , #2 and #3 correspond to the Rx beam #1 , #2 and #3, respectively. Immediately before a transmission with a given Tx beam, LBT may have to be performed by using the Rx beam which is linked from the given Tx beam. In other words, once the gNB 160 obtains a channel by using the LBT with a given Rx beam, the gNB 160 may be allowed to perform a transmission with the Tx beam which is linked to the given Rx beam. LBT parameters may be managed per Tx beam. COT may be figured per Tx beam. Within the COT for a given Tx beam, the gNB 160 may be allowed, subject to Cat-1 or Cat-2 LBT, to perform transmissions using the given Tx beam. Additionally, some of the LBT parameters may be managed per node. For example, a single counter may be generated and updated for each Tx beam, while a single CWS per node may be adjusted by considering collisions on all of the Tx beams. The COT may be figured per node. Within the COT, the gNB 160 may be allowed, subject to Cat-1 or Cat-2 LBT, to perform transmissions using any of the Tx beams.
[0200] Figure 42 shows an example of sub-band configuration. A NR band may include one or more NR carriers (also referred to as just carrier). A carrier may include one or more BWPs. BWP#0 (also referred to as initial BWP or initial DL BWP, which may be configured by Master Information Block (MIB), System Information Block type 1 (SIB 1 ), or equivalent for PCell) may have 20 MHz bandwidth. The other BWPs may have bandwidth of multiple of 20 MHz. Each sub-band may comprise 20 MHz or a multiple of 20 MHz bandwidth and is defined within a BWP. BWP#0 may consist of a single 20MHz sub-band. Any other BWP may consist of one or more sub-bands. The sub-band may be a unit of frequency scheduling. The sub-band may also referred to as sub-channel, channel access bandwidth, or the like. A higher layer configuration about a BWP may include a configurations of sub-band(s) in the BWP. Alternatively, the sub-band(s) may be configured by using frequency domain resource allocations in CORESET configurations. The sub-band may be an upper limit of the resources which is schedulable by a single DCI. In other words, PDSCH/PUSCH resource allocation is defined within a sub-band and not across a sub-band boundary. The sub-band may be a unit of LBT. The sub-band may be a unit of CORESET configuration. CORESET frequency resource allocation is defined within a sub-band and not across a sub-band boundary.
[0201] Additionally and/or alternatively, CORESET configuration may contains information for indicating frequency repetition of the CORESET. For example, if CORESET configuration contains an information element for frequency repetition, the frequency repetition of the CORESET may be considered to be enabled if CORESET configuration does not contain the information element for frequency repetition, the frequency repetition of the CORESET may be considered to be disabled. The information element for frequency repetition may include one or more of 1) frequency domain repetition factor (i.e. the number of frequency domain repetitions), 2) frequency domain interval between adjacent repetitions, etc. If UE 102 is configured with the repetition enabled, the UE 102 may assume the same set of PDCCHs are transmitted among those repeated CORESETs.
[0202] PDCCH in a CORESET in a given sub-band may be able to schedule a PDSCH only in the same sub-band. For example, DCI format(s) used for the scheduling of PDSCH/PUSCH in a NR-U cell may include a frequency domain resource assignment field - | log2(A (/V + l)/2)] bits, where N may be the size of the bandwidth of the sub-band where the PDCCH carrying the DCI is detected, in case the DCI is detected in UE specific search space and satisfying requirement(s) on the total number of different DCI sizes. Otherwise (e.g. in case the DCI is detected in common search space), N may be the size of the bandwidth of the sub-band which corresponds to an initial BWP (i.e. BWP#0). N may be expressed in RB number.
[0203] In a BWP, the gNB 160 may perform channel sensing in every sub-band and may transmit a signal (PDCCH, PDSCH, etc) in the sub-band(s) on which the gNB 160 gets a channel access successfully. The UE 102 may be able to monitor PDCCHs in multiple CORESET which correspond to different sub-bands. The gNB 160 may manage the LBT parameters per sub-band, alternatively per BWP, or yet alternatively per cell. Additionally and/or alternatively some of the LBT parameters may be managed per sub-band, which the others may be managed differently (e.g. per BWP or per cell).
[0204] In a BWP, the UE 102 may perform channel sensing in every sub-band and may transmit a signal (PUCCH, PUSCH, etc) in the sub-band(s) on which the UE 102 gets a channel access successfully. The gNB 1 60 may be able to monitor the signal in every sub-bands. The UE 102 may manage the LBT parameters per sub-band, alternatively per BWP, or yet alternatively per cell. Additionally and/or alternatively some of the LBT parameters may be managed per sub-band, which the others may be managed differently (e.g. per BWP or per cell).
[0205] Additionally and/or alternatively, PDCCH in each sub-band may be able to schedule a PDSCH in the whole bandwidth of the BWP. For example, DCI format(s) used for the scheduling of PDSCH/PUSCH in a NR-U cell may include a frequency domain resource assignment field - | log2(A (N + l)/2) bits, where N may be the size of the bandwidth of the active BWP. In the BWP, the gNB 160 may prepare a PDSCH/PUSCH assuming that the whole bandwidth of the BWP is available for the PDSCH/PUSCH transmission. The gNB 160 may perform channel sensing in every sub-band and may transmit the prepared PDSCH only on the sub-band(s) where the LBT was successful. On the sub-band(s) where the LBT was failed, the PDSCH resources (e.g. REs or RBs) may have to be punctured (i.e. the PDSCH is not mapped to the physical resources) so that the PDSCH transmission does not happen in those sub-band(s). Regarding PDCCH which schedules the PDSCH, multiples PDCCHs scheduling the same PDSCH may be prepared. These PDCCHs may be assumed to be mapped in different sub-bands in the BWP. The PDCCH(s) in the sub-band(s) on which the gNB 160 gets a channel access successfully may be transmitted, while The PDCCH(s) in the sub-band(s) on which the gNB 160 does not get a channel access successfully may not be transmitted.
[0206] In this case, if the gNB 160 gets the channel access in more than one sub-band, the UE 102 may detect more than one PDCCHs that schedule the same PDSCH. Scheduling the same PDSCH may mean the DCIs in the PDCCH have the same value in every information field and CRC. Alternatively, it may mean the DCIs in the PDCCH indicate the same PDSCH parameter set, e.g. allocated resources, counter DAI, PUCCH resource, etc. Yet alternatively, it may mean those PDCCHs are repeated among the repeated CORESETs (i.e. CORESETS with the frequency domain repetition). If the UE 102 may detect more than one PDCCHs that schedule the same PDSCH, the UE may have to discard the PDCCHs except for one of them. In other words, only one PDCCH is considered to be valid, while all the other detected PDCCHs are considered to be invalid. Alternatively, the UE 102 may consider those multiple detected PDCCHs as a single detected PDCCH, and the duplicated indications of the multiple detected PDCCHs may apply only once.
[0207] The above-described principle may apply to the other type of DCI (e.g. DCI format 0_0, 0_1 , 2_0, 2_1 , 2_2, 2_3) than the one scheduling PDSCH. For example, the gNB 1 60 may transmit multiple PDCCHs with DCI format 2_2 in the multiple sub-bands in the BWP. If the UE 102 detects the multiple PDCCHs with DCI format
2_2 in the multiple sub-bands, the TPC command of only one of the PDCCHs with the DCI format 2_2 may apply and the TPC command(s) of the other PDCCHs may not apply.
[0208] The frequency domain resource assignment field in the DCI in the PDCCH may indicate allocated resources (e.g. resource blocks) comprise the resources on the sub-band(s) to which the gNB 160 does not actually map the PDSCH due to a channel access failure. Without any supplementary information, the UE 102 detecting the DCI may assume that the PDSCH is mapped to the resources in those sub-band(s).
[0209] Alternatively, the UE 102 may utilize some supplementary information so that the UE 102 can perform PDSCH decoding assuming that the PDSCH is not mapped to the resource in those sub-band(s). The supplementary information may be results of PDCCH detections in the sub-bands. Additionally and/or alternatively, the supplementary information may be information provided by CC-PDCCH or SFI PDCCH. Additionally and/or alternatively, the supplementary information may be information provided by DCI format 2_1 (also referred to as pre-emption indication).
[0210] Based on the results of PDCCH detections in the sub-bands, the UE 102 may perform PDSCH decoding assuming that the PDSCH is not mapped to the resource in those sub-band(s). More specifically, for example, the UE 102 configured with the repetition of the CORESET, the UE 102 may assume multiple PDCCHs scheduling a single PDSCH are transmitted in all repetitions of the CORESET. If the UE 102 does not detect the PDCCH in a given sub-band, the UE 102 may assume that the scheduled PDSCH resources in the sub-band are not available for the PDSCH transmission and that the PDSCH is punctured (i.e. prepared to be mapped but not actually mapped) on those PDSCH resources. On the other hand, if the UE 102 detects the PDCCH in a given sub-band, the UE 102 may assume the scheduled PDSCH resources in the sub-band are available for the PDSCH transmission.
[021 1] Based on the information provided by CC-PDCCH or SFI PDCCH, the UE 102 may perform PDSCH decoding assuming that the PDSCH is not mapped to the resource in those sub-band(s). For example, SFI PDCCH (e.g. PDCCH with DCI format 2_0 or PDCCH with DCI format which indicates slot format(s)) which indicates a slot format may be transmitted in every sub-band in a BWP. A reference subcarrier spacing configuration
Figure imgf000090_0001
may be configured by higher layer parameter. Each SFI PDCCH may indicate a slot format and/or COT structure in the respective sub-band where the SFI PDCCH is mapped.
[0212] The slot format may include one or more of 1 ) a slot configuration period of P, 2) the number of slots ^slols with only downlink symbols, 3) the number of downlink symbols ^sym, 4) the number of slots “slots with only uplink symbols, 5) the number of uplink symbols Msym. A slot configuration period of P msec includes 5 = R· 2m,L slots with subcarrier spacing configuration ^ref . From the ^ slots, a first “^iots slots include only downlink symbols and a last Mslots slots include only uplink symbols. The ^sym symbols after the first ^slols slots are downlink symbols. The usy™ symbols before the last Mslots slots are uplink symbols. The remaining
Figure imgf000090_0002
e fjgxjkig symbols. The slot configuration period P may be assumed to be a remaining COT duration. The slot format may include multiple sets of a combination among the above 1 ) to 5). In this case, the total length of the multiple slot configuration periods may be assumed to be a remaining COT duration.
[0213] Alternatively and/or additionally, the slot format may include one or more of 1 ) the number of downlink symbols ^sym, 2) the number of flexible symbols 4m, 3) the number of uplink symbols Msym. From the first symbol on which the SFI PDCCH is mapped, a first ^sym symbols are downlink symbols. The next m symbols are flexible symbols, followed by Msym uplink symbols. The slot configuration period P may be equal to csym + 4m + ½ym- The slot configuration period P may be assumed to be a remaining COT duration starting with the first symbol on which the SFI PDCCH is mapped. The slot format may include multiple sets of a combination among the above 1 ) to 3). In this case, the n-th set of ^sym downlink symbols may start with the next symbol of the n— 1 -th set of the Usym uplink symbols. The total length of the multiple slot configuration periods may be assumed to be a remaining COT duration.
[0214] Alternatively and/or additionally, one or more (e.g. up to 512) sets (i.e. entries) of the forementioned configuration may be configured by higher layer parameters. The SFI PDCCH may have the first bit field (e.g. a 9-bit field) to indicate the index of the entry of which the corresponding slot format configuration is applied. In addition, the second bit field may also be included in the SFI PDCCH. The second bit field may indicate the start of the remaining COT within the COT structure which is indicated by the first bit field. For example, the slot format configuration indicated by the first bit field may contain N sets of combinations of 1 ) the number of downlink symbols 2) the number of flexible symbols fsym, 3) the number of uplink symbols
M S ym y g seconc| bit field may indicate one of three states, each of the states corresponds to the first downlink symbol of the respective combination of 1 ), 2) and 3). The indicated symbol may be considered as a starting symbol of the remaining COT, and/or the indicated symbol may be considered to be the first symbol of the symbol set where the detected SFI PDCCH is mapped.
[0215] More specifically, inside the DL COT, the gNB 160 may transmit the SFI PDCCH at the beginning of every slot. At multiple slots within the same COT, the gNB may transmit multiple SFI PDCCHs of which first bit fields indicate the same slot format configuration, while second bit fields indicate different values. The value of each of the second bit fields may correspond to the respective SFI PDCCH location within the indicated slot format.
[0216] In addition to DL/Flexible/UL, the slot format indications / configurations may also be able to indicate Unoccupied symbol(s). For example, the slot format may also include the number of Unoccupied symbols osym. Only one osym value may be contained in a SFI PDCCH, irrespective of the number of sets of DL/Flexible/UL symbols. The indicated unoccupied symbols may be concatenated with the indicated DL/Flexible/UL symbols at the end, where the remaining COT does not include those unoccupied symbols. The gNB 160 may set the symbols outside COT with Unoccupied. The UE 102 may assume the unoccupied symbol(s) is not covered by the DL COT, and may not be allowed to use Cat-1 or Cat-2 LBT for a UL transmission on those unoccupied symbol(s). Unoccupied may be also referred to as
Outside COT. [0217] If the UE 102 does not detect some physical signal (e.g. a known physical signal described below) in the beginning of a slot but if the UE 102 detects the physical signal in a middle of the slot, the UE 102 may assume the remaining part (i.e. the part on and after the symbol where the physical signal is mapped) of the slot is filled with downlink symbol(s). The symbols prior to the symbol where the physical signal is mapped may be assumed to be filled with unoccupied symbol(s). If the UE 102 does not detect the physical signal in a given slot at all, the UE 102 may assume that all symbols in the slot are filled with unoccupied symbols.
[0218] The PDCCHs in different sub-bands may contain different slot format field values, while downlink portions may have to be aligned among the slot formats in the PDCCHs, and also uplink portions may have to be aligned among the slot formats in the PDCCHs. In other words, in this example, COT (e.g. start timing of the COT, duration of the COT, end timing of the COT, or any combination of them) is signaled per sub-band, while DL/Flexible/UL configurations within the COTs are aligned among sub-bands.
[0219] In another example, SFI PDCCH may be transmitted in one sub-band in a BWP, where the sub-band may need to be one of the sub-band(s) in which the gNB 160 gets channel access successfully. The UE 102 may monitor SFI PDCCH in all or some of the sub-bands. The SFI PDCCH may contain the first bit field which indicate a slot format, where the aforementioned slot format indications and/or configurations may be applicable. The SFI PDCCH may also contain the second bit field which indicates channel occupancy status of all the sub-bands in the BWP. A simple option to indicate channel occupancy status of all the sub-bands may be a bitmap based indication. The size of the second bit field may be equal to the number of the sub-bands, and each bit corresponds to the respective sub-band. If the gNB 160 gets Cat-4 based channel access successfully in a given sub-band and the SFI PDCCH is transmitted inside the DL COT based on that channel access, the value of the bit corresponding to the given sub-band may be set to one. If the gNB 160 does not get Cat-4 based channel access successfully in a given sub-band or the SFI PDCCH is transmitted outside the DL COT, the value of the bit corresponding to the given sub-band may be set to zero. The values, i.e. one and zero, can be reversed. The slot format indicated by the first bit field may be applicable to only the sub-band(s) which is indicated by the second bit field as inside the DL COT. The slot format indicated by the first bit field may be not applicable to the sub-band(s) which is indicated by the second bit field as outside the DL COT. The resources in the sub-band(s) which is indicated by the second bit field as outside the DL COT may be considered as unoccupied, irrespective of the indicated slot format.
[0220] In another example, a combination of the above-described signaling may be used. More specifically, SFI PDCCH may be transmitted in one sub-band in a BWP, where the sub-band may need to be one of the sub-band(s) in which the gNB 160 gets channel access successfully. The UE 102 may monitor SFI PDCCH in all or some of the sub-bands and may detect the one which is actually transmitted by the gNB 160. At the same time, CC-PDCCH which indicates COT duration may be transmitted in every sub-band in the BWP. The UE 102 may obtain the slot format based on the SFI PDCCH. The UE 102 may obtain whether each sub-band is occupied (i.e. inside the COT) or not based on CC-PDCCH in the respective sub-band. The slot format indicated by the SFI PDCCH may be applicable only to the sub-bands which are indicated by the CC-PDCCHs as occupied. The resources in the sub-band(s) which is indicated by the CC-PDCCH as outside the DL COT may be considered as unoccupied, irrespective of the indicated slot format by the SFI PDCCH.
[0221] Based on pre-emption indication, the UE 102 may perform PDSCH decoding assuming that the PDSCH is not mapped to the resource in those sub-band(s). For example, the gNB 160 schedules PDSCH in a slot, and the scheduling PDCCH indicates frequency domain resources for PDSCH are mapped to resources in one or more sub-bands. However, some of the sub-bands is actually not available for the PDSCH transmission, because of the LBT failure. In this case, the gNB 160 may transmit a pre-emption indication in the next or later slot. The pre-emption indication indicates the PDSCH transmission in the sub-band was interrupted (punctured). If the UE 102 detects the pre-emption indication, the UE 102 may decode the PDSCH assuming that there was no PDSCH transmission in the sub-band but the PDSCH was transmitted only using the other sub-band(s). In this case, granularity of possibly interrupted resources may be a sub-band or multiple of sub-band. To be more specific, if a UE detects a DCI format 2_1 for a serving cell from the configured set of serving cells, the UE may assume that no transmission to the UE is present in PRBs and in symbols that are indicated by the DCI format 2_1 , from a set of PRBs and a set of symbols of the last monitoring period. The indication by the DCI format 2_1 is not applicable to receptions of SS/PBCH blocks. An indication granularity for time-frequency resources may be configured by higher layer parameter. The set of PRBs may be set to be equal to the bandwidth of a sub-band. [0222] Figure 43 shows an example of PDCCH monitoring occasions. At the beginning part of a transmission burst, a known physical signal may be transmitted. If UE 102 detects the known signal in a slot, the UE 102 may start monitoring of PDCCH in the same or the next slot. The known signal may be referred to as a triggering signal. When NR-U cell is configured, possible locations of triggering signal may also be configured by higher layer signaling. Each of the possible locations may be tied to a respective PDCCH monitoring occasion. Once the UE 102 detect the triggering signal in a given location, the UE 102 may monitor PDCCH in the PDCCH monitoring occasion which is derived from the location of the detected triggering signal in the slot. If the UE 102 is configured with search space set(s) each having a periodicity longer than or equal to one slot, the UE 102 is not expected to monitor the other PDCCH monitoring occasions in the same slot. In the next and later slots, the UE 102 may follow search space configuration to determine PDCCH monitoring occasions. Possible signal structure of the triggering signal may be PSS/SSS, CSI-RS, PT-RS, wideband DMRS for PDCCH, or Wi-Fi preamble-like preamble.
[0223] Even if the triggering signal take the similar structure as PSS/SSS, the structure may not be exactly the same as regular PSS/SSS in order to be differentiated from regular PSS/SSS. The first option is to use a dedicated sequence(s) which is not allowed to be used for regular PSS/SSS in NR-U band. Alternatively or additionally, the relative location between PSS and SSS is different from the one of regular PSS/SSS, e.g. the locations of PSS and SSS may be swapped. Additionally and/or alternatively PSS and SSS may be located in adjacent OFDM symbols with a same frequency location or in a same OFDM symbol with different frequency locations. Unlike the regular PSS/SSS, the center frequency of the triggering signal may not be aligned to a frequency raster (i.e. multiple of 100 kHz).
[0224] When considering an initial partial slot, there may be two aspects. One is PDSCH mapping, while the other is PDCCH monitoring interval. Four options may be identified as possible candidates for PDSCH transmission in the partial slot at least for the first PDSCH(s) transmitted in the DL transmission burst. Option 1 is to use PDSCH(s) as in Rel— 15 NR. Option 2 is punctured PDSCH depending on LBT outcome. Option 3 is PDSCH mapping type B with durations other than 2/4/7 symbols. Option 4 is PDSCH across slot boundary.
[0225] In terms of PDCCH/PDSCH structure and PDCCH/PDSCH processing, six different examples can be considered. Case A and Case B are examples of Option 1. In Case A, an initial partial slot is filled out with several sets of a scheduling PDCCH and the scheduled PDSCH. PDCCHs are transmitted in several PDCCH monitoring occasions within the initial partial slot, and each of the PDCCHs uses PDSCH mapping type B for scheduling of a respective PDSCH. From the UE 102 perspective, the behavior is the same as Case 2 PDCCH monitoring capability. From the gNB 160 point of view, the first PDCCH generation has to be after the successful LBT, while the gNB 160 can start to prepare a transport block for the first PDSCH before getting the channel access. On the other hand, the time duration of the second PDSCH needs to be adjusted depending on the timing of the successful LBT. Therefore, the processing for the second PDSCH and the corresponding PDCCH has to be after the channel access.
[0226] Case 2 PDCCH monitoring capability is a UE feature which supports
PDCCH monitoring on any span of up to 3 consecutive OFDM symbols of a slot. For PDSCH mapping type A, the duration is between the first OFDM symbol of the slot and the last OFDM symbol of the scheduled PDSCH resources in the slot. For PDSCH mapping type B, the duration is the number of OFDM symbols of the scheduled PDSCH resources as signalled. For PDSCH mapping type B, the PDSCH duration is either 2, 4, or 7 OFDM symbols for normal cyclic prefix or either 2, 4, 6 OFDM symbols for extended cyclic prefix.
[0227] The difference of Case B from Case A is the number of PDCCH monitoring occasions within the initial partial slot. That of Case B is only one, in which several PDCCHs are transmitted. From the UE perspective, PDCCH monitoring processing requirement is not as much as Case A, because of less monitoring occasions within the initial partial slot. However, Case B may require a bit more processing ability to the gNB 160 side compared with Case A, because the gNB 160 needs to finish the scheduling of the second PDSCH before the first PDCCH transmission.
[0228] Case C is related to Option 2 and 3. In Case C, an initial partial slot is filled out with a single scheduling PDCCH and a single scheduled PDSCH. The gNB 160 starts PDSCH preparation prior to getting the channel, and right after the successful LBT the gNB generates PDCCH and transmits it followed by the PDSCH. The duration of the actual transmitted PDSCH is shorter than the assumed duration for the preparation. Therefore, puncturing or rate-matching needs to be applied to the PDSCH. Some information related to the modified duration (e.g. duration other than 2/4/7 symbols) could be carried in the scheduling PDCCH, since the PDCCH generation starts after the LBT. From the UE 102 point of view, processing requirement for Case C is almost the same as for Case B. [0229] In Case C, even though the gNB 160 does not update PDCCH contents based on when the gNB gets the channel access successfully, actual time domain allocation of the PDSCH may be different from the assumption of the PDSCH preparation which affects the PDCCH contents. Therefore, UE 102 may interpret the PDCCH contents in a different way from the case when the UE 102 receives the PDCCH in a higher-layer configured PDCCH monitoring occasions.
[0230] For example, when the UE 102 receives the PDCCH in a higher-layer configured PDCCH monitoring occasions, the Time domain resource assignment field value m of the DCI provides a row index m + 1. The indexed row defines the slot offset K0, the start and length indicator SLIV, or directly the start symbol S and the allocation length L, and the PDSCH mapping type to be assumed in the PDSCH reception. The slot allocated for the PDSCH is
Figure imgf000099_0001
where n is the slot with the scheduling DCI, and K0 is based on the numerology of PDSCH, and ^PDSCH and are the subcarrier spacing configurations for PDSCH and PDCCH, respectively. The starting symbol S relative to the start of the slot, and the number of consecutive symbols L counting from the symbol S allocated for the PDSCH are determined from the start and length indicator SLIV: if (i _l) £ 7 then SLIV = U- (L-1) + S e|se SLIV = 14 · (14 - L + 1) + (14 - 1 - 5) where 0 < Z < 14-S
Transport block size may be determined based on the S and L.
[0231] When the UE 102 receives the PDCCH in a higher-layer configured
PDCCH monitoring occasions, the slot allocated for the PDSCH may be derived in the above method. Time domain resource allocation is determined by S and L. Transport block size may be determined based on the S’ and L’ , where S’ = S - X and L’ = L + X. X may be signaled by the same PDCCH. Alternatively, X is an offset between a PDCCH monitoring occasion and actually received PDCCH location in the slot.
[0232] Case D is related to Option 2. The difference of Case D from Case C is PDCCH contents. In Case D, the gNB 160 prepares the PDCCH prior to getting the channel. Therefore, the DCI cannot indicate the accurate time domain resource allocation. The duration could be tied to the time domain location of the PDCCH which is actually transmitted. From the UE point of view, processing requirement for Case D is almost the same as for Case B.
[0233] In Case D, even though the gNB 160 does not update PDCCH contents based on when the gNB gets the channel access successfully, actual time domain allocation of the PDSCH may be different from the assumption of the PDSCH preparation which affects the PDCCH contents. Therefore, UE 102 may interpret the PDCCH contents in a different way from the case when the UE 102 receives the PDCCH in a higher-layer configured PDCCH monitoring occasions.
[0234] For example, when the UE 102 receives the PDCCH in a higher-layer configured PDCCH monitoring occasions, the Time domain resource assignment field value m of the DCI provides a row index m + 1. The indexed row defines the slot offset K0, the start and length indicator SLIV, or directly the start symbol S and the allocation length L, and the PDSCH mapping type to be assumed in the PDSCH reception. The slot allocated for the PDSCH is
Figure imgf000100_0001
where n is the slot with the scheduling DCI, and K0 is based on the numerology of PDSCH, and ^PDSCH and -“PDCCH are the subcarrier spacing configurations for PDSCH and PDCCH, respectively. The starting symbol S relative to the start of the slot, and the number of consecutive symbols L counting from the symbol S allocated for the PDSCH are determined from the start and length indicator SLIV: if (^-!) - ? then
SLIV = \ - (L-\) + S e|se ffl/r = 14. (14- I + l) + C14-l -S) where 0 < Z < 14-S . Jhe S denotes an index of the starting symbol of PDSCH time domain resource allocation, and the L denotes the length of PDSCH time domain resource allocation. The PDSCH mapping type is set to Type A or Type B.
[0235] When the UE 102 receives the PDCCH in a higher-layer configured PDCCH monitoring occasions, the slot allocated for the PDSCH may be derived in the above method. The starting symbol S’ may be set to S + X, where X is an offset between a PDCCH monitoring occasion and actually received PDCCH location in the slot. The duration may be set to min(L, min(S’ + L, 14) - S’ ) for normal CP and min(L, min(S’ + L, 12) - S’ ) for extended CP, so that the end point of the PDSCH time domain allocation does not exceed the end boundary of the slot. Transport block size may be determined based on the time domain resource allocation assuming the S and L.
[0236] Case E is similar to Case C in terms of PDCCH and PDSCH processing. In Case C, the PDSCH for the initial slot is shifted and is mapped across the slot boundary to the next slot. Therefore, Case E is related to Option 4. The duration of the actual transmitted PDSCH is the same as the assumed duration for the preparation. The gNB 160 may adjust the duration of a PDSCH in the next slot based on the timing of the LBT in the initial partial slot so that the end of the PDSCH in the next slot is aligned to the next slot boundary.
[0237] Case F is also related to Option 4. The difference of Case F from Case E is PDCCH contents. In Case D, the gNB 160 prepares the PDCCH prior to getting the channel as in Case D. Therefore, the DCI cannot indicate the accurate time domain resource allocation. The actual time domain resource allocation could be tied to the time domain location of the PDCCH which schedules the concerned PDSCH. From the UE 102 point of view, processing requirement for Case F is almost the same as for Case B.
[0238] In Case F, even though the gNB 160 does not update PDCCH contents based on when the gNB gets the channel access successfully, actual time domain allocation of the PDSCH may be different from the assumption of the PDSCH preparation which affects the PDCCH contents. Therefore, UE 102 may interpret the PDCCH contents in a different way from the case when the UE 102 receives the PDCCH in a higher-layer configured PDCCH monitoring occasions.
[0239] For example, when the UE 102 receives the PDCCH in a higher-layer configured PDCCH monitoring occasions, the Time domain resource assignment field value m of the DCI provides a row index m + 1. The indexed row defines the slot offset K0, the start and length indicator SLIV, or directly the start symbol S and the allocation length L, and the PDSCH mapping type to be assumed in the PDSCH reception. The slot allocated for the PDSCH is
Figure imgf000102_0001
where n is the slot with the scheduling DCI, and K0 is based on the numerology of PDSCH, and '“PDSCH and ^PDCCH are the subcarrier spacing configurations for PDSCH and PDCCH, respectively. The starting symbol S relative to the start of the slot, and the number of consecutive symbols L counting from the symbol S allocated for the PDSCH are determined from the start and length indicator SLIV: if
Figure imgf000103_0001
then
Figure imgf000103_0002
denotes an index of the starting symbol of PDSCH time domain resource allocation, and the L denotes the length of PDSCH time domain resource allocation. The PDSCH mapping type is set to Type A or Type B.
[0240] When the UE 102 receives the PDCCH in a higher-layer configured PDCCH monitoring occasions, the slot allocated for the PDSCH may be derived in the above method. The starting symbol S’ may be set to S + X, where X is an offset between a PDCCH monitoring occasion and actually received PDCCH location in the slot. The duration may be set to L. Transport block size may be determined based on the time domain resource allocation assuming the S and L.
[0241] Figure 44 shows an example of triggering signal and CORESET resource allocation. Once UE 102 detect the triggering signal, the UE 102 may monitor PDCCH in the CORESET which is multiplexed with the triggering signal in frequency domain. In this case, the PDCCH monitoring occasion is derived from the time domain location of the detected triggering signal.
[0242] Figure 45 shows an example of triggering signal and CORESET resource allocation. In this example, the triggering signal and the corresponding CORESET are multiplexed in time domain. Also in this case, the PDCCH monitoring occasion is derived from the time domain location of the detected triggering signal. [0243] Alternatively and/or additionally, the PDCCH monitoring occasion may be derived from the time domain location of the detected triggering signal and a relation between CORESET frequency resource allocation and the frequency location of the triggering signal. More specifically, if configured CORESET resource overlaps the triggering signal in frequency domain, the PDCCH monitoring occasion is right after the triggering signal location in time domain. If configured CORESET resource does not overlap the triggering signal in frequency domain, the PDCCH monitoring occasion starts on the same symbol as the triggering signal location in time domain.
[0244] In the PDCCH monitoring occasion which is tied to the detected triggering signal, SFI using DCI format 2_0 (also referred to as SFI PDCCH) or common control-PDCCH (CC-PDCCH) or equivalent may be monitored. Unlike NR operation in license band, the SFI for NR-U may support only up to one DL-to-UL switching point.
[0245] Figure 30 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling. A RRC message (e.g. a dedicated RRC message, a common RRC message, or a broadcasted RRC message) may contain an information element for configuring one or more (e.g. less than or equal to the number of configured serving cells) SFI combination set(s), which may also be referred to as SlotFormatCombinationsPerCell. The RRC message may also contain an information element for configurating a set of one or more (e.g. N) slot format combination configuration(s), which is referred to as SFI combination(s) or as slotFormatCombinations. Each of the slot format combination configuration(s) may include a slot format combination and a slot format combination ID. Each of the SFI combination set(s) may apply to a respective cell or to a respective LBT sub-band. The configuration of each of the SFI combination set(s) may include a serving cell ID (or LBT sub-band ID) which is the ID of the serving cell for which the slotFormatCombinations are applicable, subcarrier spacing which is a reference subcarrier spacing for this Slot Format Combination, one or more (e.g. N, an integer whose value is up to 512) slot format combination ID(s), a position in DCI for specifying the (starting) position (bit) of the slotFormatCombinationld (SFI -Index) for this serving cell (servingCellld) within the DCI payload. Each entry of the one or more slot format combination(s) may include a slot format combination ID and a combination of slot format(s) for one or more (e.g. M, for the SFI combination /(/= 1 , 2, , N), Mi being an integer whose value is up to 256) consecutive slot(s). The number of slot formats indicated by a respective entry may be same or different from the one of another entry.
[0246] The DCI format carried by the GC-PDCCH may contain a bit field (also referred to as an SFHndex field) for indicate one entry out of the configured slot format combination(s). The bit field size may be determined by using the number of the configured slot format combination(s). The SFHndex field value in the DCI format indicates to a UE a slot format for each slot in a number of slots for each DL BWP or each UL BWP starting from a slot where the UE detects the DCI format. In a non NR-U serving cell (i.e. NR serving cell operated in a license band), the number of slots may be equal to or larger than a PDCCH monitoring periodicity for DCI format carrying the SFI. In an NR-U serving cell, the number of slots may be allowed to be smaller than a PDCCH monitoring periodicity for DCI format carrying the SFI. The SFHndex field includes max{[log2(maxSFIindex + l)],l} bits where maxSFIindex is the maximum value of the values provided by corresponding slotFormatCombinationld. A slot format is identified by a corresponding format index as provided in Table 1 where Ό’ denotes a downlink symbol,’Ll’ denotes an uplink symbol, and 'F' denotes a flexible symbol. The SFHndex field set to n may indicate slot formats of the Mn slots starting with the slot where the UE 102 detects the DCI format, and each slot format included in the slot format combination with the slot format combination ID equal to n corresponds to a respective slot within the Mn slots. The slot formats in Table 1 may be applicable to NR-U serving cells as well as non NR-U serving cells.
[0247] Table 1 : Slot formats.
Figure imgf000107_0001
Figure imgf000108_0001
[0248] GC-PDCCH carrying SFI may be applicable to a BWP comprising of more than one LBT sub-bands, where an operation of a BWP having more than one LBT sub-bands may be also referred to as a wideband operation.
[0249] Figure 31 shows a dynamic SFI signaling for a wideband operation. LBT may be performed per LBT sub-band. When the gNB 160 obtains a channel access on a given LBT sub-band after performing LBT, the gNB 160 may transmit GC-PDCCH at the beginning part of the transmission initiated by the LBT. The GC-PDCCH may carry the DCI format for indicating slot format(s) of the LBT sub-band where the GC-PDCCH is detected. This kind of GC-PDCCH may be referred to as aperiodic GC-PDCCH hereafter. It is noted that the beginning part can be a part including the starting symbol of the transmission but does not necessarily always mean it. The beginning part can be a location relatively close to the beginning within the transmission, and there may be one or a few symbols and/or a fractional symbol between the beginning of the transmission and the starting symbol of the symbol(s) carrying the GC-PDCCH.
[0250] The slot where the UE 102 detects the GC-PDCCH in a given LBT sub-band may or may not be different from the slot where the UE 102 detects the GC-PDCCH in another LBT sub-band. Even if they are detected in a same slot, the symbol(s) where the UE 102 detects the GC-PDCCH in the given LBT sub-band may or may not be different from the symbol(s) where the UE 102 detects the GC-PDCCH in the other LBT sub-band. The UE 102 may not expect that the symbol which is indicated as DL by GC-PDCCH in a given LBT sub-band is indicated as UL by another GC-PDCCH in another LBT sub-band in a same BWP. The UE 102 may not expect that the symbol which is indicated as UL by GC-PDCCH in a given LBT sub-band is indicated as DL by another GC-PDCCH in another LBT sub-band in a same BWP.
[0251] If DL transmissions using some but not all of the LBT sub-bands within a
BWP is allowed but UL transmissions using some but not all of the LBT sub-bands within the BWP is not allowed, the restriction of the alignment between LBT sub-bands may be different between DL and UL. For example, the symbol which is indicated as DL by GC-PDCCH in a given LBT sub-band may be able to be indicated as either DL or Flexible by another GC-PDCCH in another LBT sub-band in a same BWP, while the UE 102 may not expect that the symbol which is indicated as UL by GC-PDCCH in a given LBT sub-band is indicated as either DL or Flexible by another GC-PDCCH in another LBT sub-band in a same BWP.
[0252] The UE 102 which is capable for PDCCH receptions and/or PDSCH receptions in initial partial slots may have to monitor GC-PDCCH with a periodicity shorter than a slot length (e.g. 1 ms for 15kHz sub-carrier spacing, 0.5ms for 30kHz sub-carrier spacing). For example, GC-PDCCH monitoring occasions may start at every 2 OFDM symbol, though minimum interval of normal PDCCH monitoring occasions may be 1 OFDM symbol (i.e. the normal PDCCH monitoring occasions may be able to start at every OFDM symbol). If a given GC-PDCCH monitoring occasion consists of the symbol(s) which is indicated as Flexible by a previous GC-PDCCH, the UE 102 may follow the same GC-PDCCH monitoring procedure, namely the UE 102 may monitor GC-PDCCH. On the other hand, a given GC-PDCCH monitoring occasion entirely or partially includes the symbol(s) which is indicated as DL or UL by a previous GC-PDCCH, the UE 102 may not have to monitor GC-PDCCH in the GC-PDCCH monitoring occasion, except for the GC-PDCCH monitoring occasion located within the first 3 symbols in a slot. In other words, the UE 102 may have to always monitor GCHPDCCH in the GC-PDCCH monitoring occasion located within the first 3 symbols in a slot, while the UE 102 may be allowed to skip monitoring of the GC-PDCCH in the other GC-PDCCH monitoring occasions which overlaps the symbol indicated as either DL or UL by a previous GC-PDCCH. [0253] Figure 32 shows a dynamic SFI signaling for a wideband operation. LBT may be performed per LBT sub-band. The gNB 160 may transmit GC-PDCCH on a given LBT sub-band, preferably periodically, and the UE 102 may monitor the GC-PDCCH on the LBT sub-band, preferably on periodic monitoring occasions. This kind of GC-PDCCH may be referred to as periodic GC-PDCCH hereafter. The GC-PDCCH may carry the DCI format for indicating slot format(s) of the LBT sub-band where the GC-PDCCH is detected, and the GC-PDCCH also carry the DCI format for indicating slot format(s) of another LBT sub-band. Alternatively and/or additionally, the GC-PDCCH may carry the DCI format for indicating slot format(s) of the LBT sub-band where the GC-PDCCH is detected, and the DCI format may also indicate slot format(s) of another LBT sub-band. The other LBT sub-band may be an LBT sub-band in the same BWP of the same serving. Alternatively, the other LBT sub-band may be an LBT sub-band in a different BWP in another serving cell.
[0254] Figure 33 shows a dynamic SFI signaling for a wideband operation. In this example, both aperiodic GC-PDCCH and periodic GC-PDCCH are used. The gNB 160 may transmit aperiodic GC-PDCCH in each LBT sub-band, while the gNB 160 may transmit periodic GC-PDCCH in a given (not limited to one) LBT sub-band(s). The contents of aperiodic GC-PDCCH and periodic GC-PDCCH may have to be aligned. More specifically, the symbol(s) indicated as DL, UL, and/or Flexible by the aperiodic GC-PDCCH may have to be indicates as DL, UL, and/or Flexible by the periodic GC-PDCCH, respectively, and the UE 102 may not expect they are indicated as different values. Alternatively and/or additionally, the symbol(s) indicated as DL, UL, and/or Flexible by the aperiodic GC-PDCCH may be indicates as a different value and therefore overridden by the periodic GC-PDCCH. Alternatively and/or additionally, the symbol(s) indicated as DL and UL by the aperiodic GC-PDCCH may have to be indicates as DL and UL by the periodic GC-PDCCH, while the symbol(s) indicated as Flexible by the aperiodic GC-PDCCH may be indicates as DL and UL and therefore overridden by the periodic GC-PDCCH.
[0255] The PDCCH monitoring occasion configurations (e.g. search space configurations) for aperiodic GC-PDCCH and periodic GC-PDCCH may be provided individually by respective dedicated configuration messages via dedicated RRC signaling.
[0256] The entries of SFI combinations for aperiodic GC-PDCCH and periodic GC-PDCCH may be provided by a same dedicated configuration message via dedicated RRC signaling. Alternatively, the entry sets of SFI combinations for aperiodic GC-PDCCH and periodic GC-PDCCH may be provided individually by different dedicated configuration messages via dedicated RRC signaling. Yet alternatively, the entry sets of SFI combinations for aperiodic GC-PDCCH for an initial BWP and the other GC-PDCCHs (including all periodic GC-PDCCH, aperiodic GC-PDCCH for non initial BWPs of PCell and aperiodic GC-PDCCH for SCell) may be provided individually via common RRC signaling (e.g. included in broad cast information such as system information) and dedicated RRC signaling, respectively. Yet alternatively, the entry sets of SFI combinations for periodic GC-PDCCH for PCell and the other GC-PDCCHs (including all aperiodic GC-PDCCH, periodic GC-PDCCH for non initial BWPs of PCell and aperiodic GC-PDCCH for SCell) may be provided individually via common RRC signaling (e.g. included in broad cast information such as system information) and dedicated RRC signaling, respectively. If the entries are configured by the common RRC signaling, the number of entries may be less than the aforementioned configuration. The entries may be pre~configured (i.e. fixed in the system), instead of being configurable via common RRC signaling.
[0257] The contents of aperiodic GC-PDCCH and periodic GC-PDCCH may be with different types. For example, the aperiodic GC-PDCCH may indicate slot format(s) as explained below, and the periodic GC-PDCCH may indicate a location of UL portion of the COT, where the UL portion may be indicated by a combination of an offset to the starting symbol of the UL portion and the duration of the UL potion. In another example, even though the aperiodic GC-PDCCH may indicate slot format(s) as explained below, the UE 102 may consider the indicated DL portion as DL but may ignore the indicated UL portion. Meanwhile, even though the periodic GC-PDCCH may indicate slot format(s) as explained below, the UE 102 may consider the indicated UL portion as UL but may ignore the indicated DL portion.
[0258] Alternatively, the contents of aperiodic GC-PDCCH and periodic GC-PDCCH may be with a same type. For example, both the aperiodic GC-PDCCH and the periodic GC-PDCCH may indicate slot format(s) as explained below.
[0259] Figure 34 shows a dynamic SFI signaling for a wideband operation. In this example, both aperiodic GC-PDCCH and periodic GC-PDCCH are used. The difference from the example in Figure 33 is that a grouping is applied to LBT sub-band#0 and LBT sub-band #1. The aperiodic GC-PDCCH may be transmitted/monitored per group, i.e. on one LBT sub-band within a group. The periodic GC-PDCCH which indicates slot formats of grouped LBT sub-bands may be transmitted/monitored per group, i.e. on one LBT sub-band within a group. The periodic GC-PDCCH may indicate slot formats of all LBT sub-bands within the group.
[0260] GC-PDCCH may be transmitted by the gNB 160 multiple times within a COT. Multiple GC-PDCCHs detected by the UE 102 in different monitoring occasions may indicate slot format(s) of a same slot(s).
[0261] Figure 35 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling. In this example, a COT includes an initial partial DL slot followed by 4 full DL slot, a special slot (e.g. slot format #28 in Table 1 ) and then 2 full UL slot, where the special slot is a slot including DL part followed by a gap, and then UL part. The slots of which SFIs are indicated by a single SFI combination may correspond to a single COT. The gNB 160 may provide an RRC configuration for configuring multiple SFI combinations. Some of the SFI combinations may indicate a same DL/UL configuration of the COT but may correspond to different GC-PDCCH transmission timings and GC-PDCCH monitoring occasions. Before detection of the GC-PDCCH in slot 1 (i.e. the starting slot of the COT), the UE 102 has not detected any GC-PDCCH of which the SFI indicates GC-PDCCH monitoring occasion in a middle of the slot 1. Therefore, the UE 102 may monitor GC-PDCCH on the GC-PDCCH monitoring occasion in a middle of the slot 1. If the UE 102 detects GC-PDCCH in a middle of the slot 1 , the UE 102 may assume there is an initial partial slot in the slot 1 , and the initial partial slot includes the detected GC-PDCCH. The value of the SFHndex field of the GC-PDCCH in the initial partial slot may indicate SFI combination #0 which consists of SFI#0 for slot 1 (i.e. the initial partial slot), SFI#0 for slots 2, 3, 4 and 5, SFI#28 for slot 6, and SFI#1 for slots 7 and 8. The UE 102 may be aware of the slot 1 is an initial partial slot, because the UE 102 has detected the GC-PDCCH in a middle of the slot 1. Therefore, the UE 102 may assume the OFDM symbols located before the GC-PDCCH within the slot 1 are not occupied (e.g. assumed to be indicated as Flexible by the GC-PDCCH) by the transmission containing the GC-PDCCH, even though the signaled slot format for the slot 1 indicates those symbols are DL symbols. The value of the SFHndex field of the GC-PDCCH in the slot 2 may indicate SFI combination #1 which consists of SFI#0 for slots 2, 3, 4 and 5, SFI#28 for slot 6, and SFI#1 for slots 7 and 8. The same principle may apply to the GC-PDCCHs in the slots 3 to 8. Alternatively and/or additionally, the initial partial slot may be indicated by a slot format. For example, the Table 1 may additionally include a single slot format which indicate at least one OFDM symbol in a slot is not occupied by the current transmission while the ending part of the same slot is occupied by the current transmission. In another example, the Table 1 may additionally include multiple slot formats each of which indicates at least one OFDM symbol in a slot is not occupied by the current transmission while the ending part of the same slot is occupied by the current transmission, and the multiple slot formats may correspond to different numbers of unoccupied (e.g. Flexible) OFDM symbols at the beginning part of the slot and/or different numbers of occupied (e.g. DL) OFDM symbols at the ending part of the slot. The additional entries described in Table 2 may be added by overriding of reserved entries in Table 1. Alternatively, the additional entries may be added by overriding of all or some of the Table-1 entries 46 to 54 which correspond to UL-to-DL switching in a middle of the slot. The slot formats in Table 2 may be applicable to NR-U serving cells but not to non NR-U serving cells. If the serving cell is NR-U, the additional entries can be used.
Otherwise, the UE 102 may use the entries in Table 1 only. Alternatively, the use of the additional entries may be configured by RRC signaling. In this case, if the RRC configuration is provided, the additional entries can be used. Otherwise the UE 102 may use the entries in Table 1 only.
[0262] Table 2: Additional slot formats.
Figure imgf000116_0001
[0263] Figure 36 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling.
In this example, a COT includes an initial partial DL slot followed by 4 full DL slot, a special slot (e.g. slot format #28 in Table 1 ) and then 2 full UL slot. The gNB 160 may provide an RRC configuration for configuring multiple SFI combinations. One of the SFI combinations may indicate a DL/UL configuration of the COT and may correspond to all of the GC-PDCCH transmission timings and all of the GC-PDCCH monitoring occasions. In any of the GC-PDCCH transmission timings and the GC-PDCCH monitoring occasions within the COT, the SFHndex fields of the GC-PDCCHs may indicate the same SFI combination which consists of SFI#0 for slot 1 (i.e. the initial partial slot), SFI#0 for slots 2, 3, 4 and 5, SFI#28 for slot 6, and SFI#1 for slots 7 and 8. In addition, the GC-PDCCH may also have a bit field to indicate additional information, where the additional information may change depending on the GC-PDCCH transmission timings and the GC-PDCCH monitoring occasions. For example, the additional information may indicate a location of a certain slot (preferably the starting slot, but it works with another type of slot, e.g. the ending slot or the slot where the GC-PDCCH is detected) of the slots of which the SFIs are indicated by the detected GC-PDCCH which also carries the information concerned. The location may be a relative location (also referred to as a slot offset or a time-domain shift with a unit of slot) from (or to) the slot where the GC-PDCCH carrying the concerned information is detected. The starting slot indicated by the concerned information may also be the slot which the current COT starts with. Alternatively, the starting slot indicated by the concerned information may not always be the same as the slot which the current COT starts with. Additionally and/or alternatively, the location may be a location within a radio frame where the GC-PDCCH carrying the concerned information is detected, and the additional information may indicate a slot index of the starting slot within a radio frame.
[0264] This scheme may also apply to the wideband operation. The CG-PDCCH may include a single SFHndex field, and the value of the SFHndex field may apply to multiple LBT sub-bands. Additionally and/or alternatively, the CG-PDCCH may include a multiple SFHndex fields, and the value of each SFHndex field may apply to a respective LBT sub-band. The CG-PDCCH may include a single bit field for indicating the COT starting timing, and the value of the bit field may apply to multiple LBT sub-bands. Additionally and/or alternatively, the CG-PDCCH may include multiple bit fields for indicating the COT starting timing, and the value of each bit field may apply to a respective LBT sub-band. The CG-PDCCH may include a single SFHndex field and multiple bit fields for indicating the COT starting timing. Alternatively, The CG-PDCCH may include multiple SFHndex fields and a single bit field for indicating the COT starting timings.
[0265] Figure 37 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling. In this example, the slots of which the SFIs are indicated by a GC-PDCCH ends with an ending partial UL slot. The slot format of the ending partial UL slot may be indicated by one or more additional entries (i.e. additional formats) of Table 1. For example, the entries described in Table 3 may be added in Table 1. Each of the additional entries may indicate the slot format that consists of a consecutive UL symbol(s) and a consecutive Flexible symbol(s) and starts with a UL symbol and ends with a Flexible symbol. The additional entries may be added by overriding of reserved entries in Table 1. Alternatively, the additional entries may be added by overriding of all or some of the Table-1 entries 46 to 54 which correspond to UL-to-DL switching in a middle of the slot. The slot formats in Table 3 may be applicable to NR-U serving cells but not to non NR-U serving cells. If the serving cell is NR-U, the additional entries can be used. Otherwise, the UE 102 may use the entries in Table 1 only. Alternatively, the use of the additional entries may be configured by RRC signaling. In this case, if the RRC configuration is provided, the additional entries can be used. Otherwise the UE 102 may use the entries in Table 1 only.
[0266] Table 3: Additional slot formats.
Figure imgf000119_0001
[0267] In order to indicate slot format of an ending partial UL slot, the gNB 160 may need to provide the RRC signaling for configuring multiple SFI combinations which correspond to different ending partial UL slot structures, and to send a GC-PDCCH having SFHndex field which is set to an appropriate value (i.e. the value corresponding to the ending partial UL slot structure that the gNB 160 is intending). If the UE 102 detects a GC-PDCCH in which the indicated SFI combination ends with a slot format ending with one or more Flexible symbols, the UE 102 may assume those Flexible symbols are not occupied by the transmission where the GC-PDCCH is transmitted and that those Flexible symbols are outside of the COT where the GC-PDCCH is transmitted, while UL symbols in the same slot may be considered as inside of the COT.
[0268] This scheme may also apply to the wideband operation. The CG-PDCCH may include a single SFHndex field, and the value of the SFHndex field may apply to multiple LBT sub-bands. Additionally and/or alternatively, the CG-PDCCH may include a multiple SFHndex fields, and the value of each SFHndex field may apply to a respective LBT sub-band.
[0269] Figure 38 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling. In this example, the slots of which the SFIs are indicated by a GC-PDCCH ends with an ending partial UL slot. The reason may be because the COT started in a middle of a starting slot and therefore maximum COT duration starting immediately after the successful channel access has to end in a middle of the last slot. The slot format of the ending partial UL slot may be indicated as an UL slot, i.e. the normal slot which is fully occupied with UL symbols. In addition, the GC-PDCCH may also have a bit field to indicate additional information, where the additional information may change depending on the ending partial UL slot structure.
[0270] For example, the additional information may indicate a selected one of the possible slot formats. The possible slot formats may be defined as in Table 3 (also possibly including an entry, e.g. the entry SFI#0 in Table 1 , for indicating that the slot is not an ending partial UL slot) separately from Table 1 , and the bit field may be set to a value corresponding to one of X0 to X12. If the UE 102 detects a GC-PDCCH where the SFHndex field indicates the COT ends with an UL slot and the additional bit field indicates the ending slot is an ending partial UL slot, the UE 102 may assume the ending slot in an ending partial UL slot indicated by the additional bit field but may not assume the ending slot in a normal slot indicated by the SFHndex field.
[0271] In another example, the additional information may indicate a COT length. The COT length may be expressed with the number of OFDM symbols, the number of slots or a combination of them within the COT. If the UE 102 is signaled with the COT length, the UE 102 may derive an ending timing of the COT, based on the signaled COT length and a reference timing (e.g. the COT starting timing). The COT starting timing as the reference may be determined by the detection timing of the first GC-PDCCH of which the indicated SFI is the same as of the current GC-PDCCH. Additionally and/or alternatively, the COT starting timing may be determined by the detection timing of the current GC-PDCCH and the aforementioned bit field for indicating the starting slot location. The reference to determine the end timing of the COT may be the location of the symbol #0 of the starting slot of the COT or may be the location of the earliest occupied OFDM symbol of the starting slot.
[0272] In yet another example, the additional information may indicate a remaining COT length. The COT length may be expressed with the number of OFDM symbols, the number of slots or a combination of them within the COT. If the UE 102 is signaled with the remaining COT length, the UE 102 may derive an ending timing of the COT, based on the signaled remaining COT length and a reference timing (e.g. the starting or ending OFDM symbol of the slot where the concerned GC-PDCCH is detected, the starting or ending OFDM symbol of the symbols where the concerned GC-PDCCH is detected or the starting OFDM symbol of the next slot).
[0273] This scheme may also apply to the wideband operation. The CG-PDCCH may include a single SFHndex field, and the value of the SFHndex field may apply to multiple LBT sub-bands. Additionally and/or alternatively, the CG-PDCCH may include a multiple SFHndex fields, and the value of each SFHndex field may apply to a respective LBT sub-band. The CG-PDCCH may include a single bit field for indicating the ending partial UL structure, the COT length or the remaining COT length, and the value of the bit field may apply to multiple LBT sub-bands. Additionally and/or alternatively, the CG-PDCCH may include multiple bit fields for indicating the ending partial UL structure, the COT length or the remaining COT length, and the value of each bit field may apply to a respective LBT sub-band. The CG-PDCCH may include a single SFHndex field and multiple bit fields for indicating the ending partial UL structure, the COT length or the remaining COT length. Alternatively, The CG-PDCCH may include multiple SFHndex fields and a single bit field for indicating the ending partial UL structure, the COT length or the remaining COT length.
[0274] Figure 39 shows an example of an SFI configuration and an SFI signaling. In this example, the slots of which the SFIs are indicated by a GC-PDCCH includes more than one DL-to-UL or UL-to-DL switching points and/or ends with an ending partial UL slot. The structure of a UL partial slot (like the 5th slot from left in the figure) in a middle of the slots of which the SFIs are indicated by the GC-PDCCH may be indicated by the SFHndex field of the GC-PDCCH as mention above, while the structure of a UL partial slot (like the 8th slot from left in the figure) at the end of the slots of which the SFIs are indicated by the GC-PDCCH may be indicated by the aforementioned additional information. This scheme may also apply to the wideband operation.
[0275] The UE 102 of which the UL transmission is scheduled may determine LBT type for the UL transmission, taking into account whether or not the UL transmission would be done within a COT explicitly and/or implicitly signaled by the gNB 160. For example, if the whole UL transmission is scheduled to be transmitted within the COT, the 102 may be allowed to perform Cat-2 LBT for the UL transmission. If at least a part of the UL transmission would be transmitted outside of the COT, the 102 may not be allowed to perform Cat-2 LBT for the UL transmission and therefore may perform Cat-4 LBT for the UL transmission.
[0276] Figure 40 shows a method for a UE which communicates with a base station. The method may comprise acquiring radio resource control (RRC) configuration information (Step 4001 ). The RRC configuration information may indicate a monitoring occasion. The method may also comprise monitoring, in a first sub-band, a first physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with a first down link control (DCI) format (Step 4002). The first DCI format may include a first information field and a second information field. The first information field may indicate a first slot format combination. The second information field may indicate a second slot format combination. The first slot format combination may be applied to the first sub-band. The second slot format combination may be applied to a second sub-band. The first sub-band and the second sub-band may be included in a same downlink bandwidth part (DL BWP).
[0277] Figure 41 shows a method for a base station which communicates with a UE. The method may comprise sending radio resource control (RRC) configuration information (Step 4101 ). The RRC configuration information may indicate a monitoring occasion. The method may also comprise transmitting, in a first sub-band, a first physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with a first down link control (DCI) format (Step 4102). The first DCI format may include a first information field and a second information field. The first information field may indicate a first slot format combination. The second information field may indicate a second slot format combination. The first slot format combination may be applied to the first sub-band. The second slot format combination may be applied to a second sub-band. The first sub-band and the second sub-band may be included in a same downlink bandwidth part (DL BWP).
[0278] It should be noted that a decision on whether a given channel and/or data (including TB and CB) is successfully received or not may be done by referring to Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) bits which is appended to the given channel and/or data.
[0279] It should be noted that various modifications are possible within the scope of the present invention defined by claims, and embodiments that are made by suitably combining technical means disclosed according to the different embodiments are also included in the technical scope of the present invention.
[0280] It should be noted that in most cases the UE 102 and the gNB. 160 may have to assume same procedures. For example, when the UE 102 follows a given procedure (e.g., the procedure described above), the gNB 160 may also have to assume that the UE 102 follows the procedure. Additionally, the gNB 160 may also have to perform the corresponding procedures. Similarly, when the gNB 160 follows a given procedure, the UE 102 may also have to assume that the gNB 160 follows the procedure. Additionally, the UE 102 may also have to perform the corresponding procedures. The physical signals and/or channels that the UE 102 receives may be transmitted by the gNB 160. The physical signals and/or channels that the UE 102 transmits may be received by the gNB 160. The higher-layer signals and/or channels (e.g., dedicated RRC configuration messages) that the UE 102 acquires may be sent by the gNB 160. The higher-layer signals and/or channels (e.g., dedicated RRC configuration messages) that the UE 102 sends may be acquired by the gNB 160. [0281] It should be noted that names of physical channels and/or signals described herein are examples.
[0282] The term “computer-readable medium” refers to any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a processor. The term“computer-readable medium,” as used herein, may denote a computer- and/or processor-readable medium that is non-transitory and tangible. By way of example, and not limitation, a computer-readable or processor-readable medium may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer or processor. Disk and disc, as used herein, includes compact disc (CD), laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc (DVD), floppy disk and Blu-ray® disc where disks usually reproduce data magnetically, while discs reproduce data optically with lasers.
[0283] It should be noted that one or more of the methods described herein may be implemented in and/or performed using hardware. For example, one or more of the methods described herein may be implemented in and/or realized using a chipset, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a large-scale integrated circuit (LSI) or integrated circuit, etc.
[0284] Each of the methods disclosed herein comprises one or more steps or actions for achieving the described method. The method steps and/or actions may be interchanged with one another and/or combined into a single step without departing from the scope of the claims. In other words, unless a specific order of steps or actions is required for proper operation of the method that is being described, the order and/or use of specific steps and/or actions may be modified without departing from the scope of the claims.
[0285] It is to be understood that the claims are not limited to the precise configuration and components illustrated above. Various modifications, changes and variations may be made in the arrangement, operation and details of the systems, methods, and apparatus described herein without departing from the scope of the claims.
[0286] A program running on the gNB 160 or the UE 102 according to the described systems and methods is a program (a program for causing a computer to operate) that controls a CPU and the like in such a manner as to realize the function according to the described systems and methods. Then, the information that is handled in these apparatuses is temporarily stored in a RAM while being processed. Thereafter, the information is stored in various ROMs or HDDs, and whenever necessary, is read by the CPU to be modified or written. As a recording medium on which the program is stored, among a semiconductor (for example, a ROM, a nonvolatile memory card, and the like), an optical storage medium (for example, a DVD, a MO, a MD, a CD, a BD, and the like), a magnetic storage medium (for example, a magnetic tape, a flexible disk, and the like), and the like, any one may be possible. Furthermore, in some cases, the function according to the described systems and methods described above is realized by running the loaded program, and in addition, the function according to the described systems and methods is realized in conjunction with an operating system or other application programs, based on an instruction from the program. [0287] Furthermore, in a case where the programs are available on the market, the program stored on a portable recording medium can be distributed or the program can be transmitted to a server computer that connects through a network such as the Internet. In this case, a storage device in the server computer also is included. Furthermore, some or all of the gNB 160 and the UE 102 according to the systems and methods described above may be realized as an LSI that is a typical integrated circuit. Each functional block of the gNB 160 and the UE 102 may be individually built into a chip, and some or all functional blocks may be integrated into a chip. Furthermore, a technique of the integrated circuit is not limited to the LSI, and an integrated circuit for the functional block may be realized with a dedicated circuit or a general-purpose processor. Furthermore, if with advances in a semiconductor technology, a technology of an integrated circuit that substitutes for the LSI appears, it is also possible to use an integrated circuit to which the technology applies.
[0288] Moreover, each functional block or various features of the base station device and the terminal device used in each of the aforementioned embodiments may be implemented or executed by a circuitry, which is typically an integrated circuit or a plurality of integrated circuits. The circuitry designed to execute the functions described in the present specification may comprise a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific or general application integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic, or a discrete hardware component, or a combination thereof. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, or alternatively, the processor may be a conventional processor, a controller, a microcontroller or a state machine. The general-purpose processor or each circuit described above may be configured by a digital circuit or may be configured by an analogue circuit. Further, when a technology of making into an integrated circuit superseding integrated circuits at the present time appears due to advancement of a semiconductor technology, the integrated circuit by this technology is also able to be used.

Claims

1. A user equipment (UE) which communicates with a base station, the UE comprising:
higher layer processing circuitry configured to acquire radio resource control (RRC) configuration information, the RRC configuration information indicating a configuration of downlink control (DCI) format 2_0; and receiving circuitry configured to monitor a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with the DCI format 2_0;
wherein
the DCI format 2_0 includes a first information field,
the first information field indicates a remaining channel occupancy duration, the remaining channel occupancy duration is expressed as the number of OFDM symbol(s) starting from a slot where the DCI format 2_0 is detected.
2. The UE according to claim 1 , wherein
the DCI format 2_0 includes a second information field,
the second information field indicates a slot format combination.
3. A base station which communicates with a user equipment (UE), the base station comprising:
higher layer processing circuitry configured to send radio resource control (RRC) configuration information, the RRC configuration information indicating a configuration of downlink control (DCI) format 2_0; and transmitting circuitry configured to transmit a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with the DCI format 2_0;
wherein
the DCI format 2_0 includes a first information field,
the first information field indicates a remaining channel occupancy duration, the remaining channel occupancy duration is expressed as the number of OFDM symbol(s) starting from a slot where the DCI format 2_0 is transmitted.
4. The base station according to claim 3, wherein
the DCI format 2_0 includes a second information field,
the second information field indicates a slot format combination.
5. A method for a user equipment (UE) which communicates with a base station, the method comprising:
acquiring radio resource control (RRC) configuration information, the RRC configuration information indicating a configuration of downlink control (DCI) format 2_0; and
monitoring a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with the DCI format
2 0
wherein
the DCI format 2_0 includes a first information field,
the first information field indicates a remaining channel occupancy duration, the remaining channel occupancy duration is expressed as the number of OFDM symbol(s) starting from a slot where the DCI format 2_0 is detected.
6. A method for a base station which communicates with a user equipment (UE), the method comprising:
sending radio resource control (RRC) configuration information, the RRC configuration information indicating a configuration of downlink control (DCI) format 2_0; and
transmitting a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with the DCI format 2_0;
wherein
the DCI format 2_0 includes a first information field,
the first information field indicates a remaining channel occupancy duration, the remaining channel occupancy duration is expressed as the number of OFDM symbol(s) starting from a slot where the DCI format 2_0 is transmitted.
PCT/JP2020/013878 2019-03-27 2020-03-19 User equipments, base stations, and methods WO2020196804A1 (en)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US17/441,056 US12063178B2 (en) 2019-03-27 2020-03-19 User equipments, base stations, and methods
SG11202110428QA SG11202110428QA (en) 2019-03-27 2020-03-19 User equipments, base stations, and methods
CN202080023240.7A CN113615244A (en) 2019-03-27 2020-03-19 User equipment, base station and method
EP20777059.5A EP3949499A4 (en) 2019-03-27 2020-03-19 User equipments, base stations, and methods

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019060240 2019-03-27
JP2019-060240 2019-03-27

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020196804A1 true WO2020196804A1 (en) 2020-10-01

Family

ID=72611544

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2020/013878 WO2020196804A1 (en) 2019-03-27 2020-03-19 User equipments, base stations, and methods

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (1) US12063178B2 (en)
EP (1) EP3949499A4 (en)
CN (1) CN113615244A (en)
SG (1) SG11202110428QA (en)
WO (1) WO2020196804A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113259876A (en) * 2021-06-22 2021-08-13 成都大学 Remote adjustment method for resolution of advertising board of Internet of things
WO2021171094A1 (en) * 2020-02-26 2021-09-02 Orope France Sarl Communication method, telecommunication system, network node, base station and user equipment
WO2022205419A1 (en) * 2021-04-02 2022-10-06 富士通株式会社 Wireless communication method and apparatus, and system

Families Citing this family (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11564223B2 (en) * 2019-05-30 2023-01-24 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Method and apparatus for uplink communication in unlicensed band
US11570778B2 (en) * 2019-08-09 2023-01-31 Qualcomm Incorporated Semi-persistent scheduling subband switching
WO2021064839A1 (en) * 2019-09-30 2021-04-08 株式会社Nttドコモ Terminal and reception method
EP4436090A2 (en) * 2019-11-07 2024-09-25 Wilus Institute of Standards and Technology Inc. Method for transmitting/receiving channel by using guard band in one carrier in wireless communication system, and device therefor
US20210058970A1 (en) * 2019-11-08 2021-02-25 Intel Corporation Mechanisms to operate on a downlink wideband carrier in unlicensed band
WO2021189382A1 (en) * 2020-03-26 2021-09-30 Nokia Shanghai Bell Co., Ltd. Scheduling release feedback
US11825468B2 (en) * 2020-04-03 2023-11-21 Qualcomm Incorporated Scheduling restrictions for canceled or conflicting resources
US20210409244A1 (en) * 2020-06-26 2021-12-30 Qualcomm Incorporated Control channel monitoring aggregation with blended resource element group (reg) bundles
US11659423B2 (en) * 2020-07-10 2023-05-23 Qualcomm Incorporated Indications of physical downlink control channel monitoring occasion aggregation via demodulation reference signal parameters
US11889521B2 (en) * 2020-08-06 2024-01-30 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for transmitting/receiving wireless signal in wireless communication system
US11617181B2 (en) * 2021-02-08 2023-03-28 Qualcomm Incorporated Multi-stage downlink grant for multiple PDSCH
CN116264736A (en) * 2021-12-10 2023-06-16 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 Method and apparatus in a node for wireless communication
WO2023152690A1 (en) * 2022-02-10 2023-08-17 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. Methods and apparatus of determining physical downlink control channel (pdcch) occasions from multiple transmission configuration indicator (tci) states

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2019060240A (en) 2017-09-25 2019-04-18 日野自動車株式会社 Flexible joint structure of exhaust pipe and its manufacturing method

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020091080A1 (en) * 2018-11-01 2020-05-07 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha User equipments, base stations, and methods
WO2020092941A1 (en) * 2018-11-02 2020-05-07 Intel Corporation Channel occupancy time indication for nr based unlicensed operation
US11375490B2 (en) * 2019-01-10 2022-06-28 Intel Corporation Monitoring downlink control channels for unlicensed operation
CN116915375A (en) * 2019-01-11 2023-10-20 Lg电子株式会社 Method and apparatus for operating in a wireless communication system
US11743937B2 (en) * 2019-10-17 2023-08-29 Mediatek Inc. Channel occupancy structure indication in the time domain

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2019060240A (en) 2017-09-25 2019-04-18 日野自動車株式会社 Flexible joint structure of exhaust pipe and its manufacturing method

Non-Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ERICSSON: "DL signals and channels for NR-U", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1902881, 1 March 2019 (2019-03-01), Athens, Greece, pages 1 - 7, XP051600579 *
HUAWEI ET AL.: "3GPP DRAFT; R1-1813903, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE", vol. RAN WG1, 13 November 2018, article "NR numerology and frame structure for unlicensed bands", pages: 20181112 - 20181116
HUAWEI ET AL.: "DL channels and signals in NR unlicensed band", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1900057, 3RD GENERATION, vol. RAN WG1, 20 January 2019 (2019-01-20), pages 20190121 - 20190125
INTEL CORPORATION: "On the NR-unlicensed frame structure", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1812479 INTEL NR-U FRAME STRUCTURE, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX; FRANCE, XP051478708, vol. RAN WG1, 3 November 2018 (2018-11-03), pages 20181112 - 20181116
MOTOROLA MOBILITY; LENOVO: "Feature lead summary for NR-U DL Signals and Channels", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1903687, 1 March 2019 (2019-03-01), Athens, Greece, pages 1 - 22, XP051690938 *
NOKIA; NOKIA SHANGHAI BELL: "On DL signals and channels", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1903241, 1 March 2019 (2019-03-01), Athens, Greece, pages 1 - 15, XP051600938 *
See also references of EP3949499A4
ZTE: "Considerations on DL reference signals and channels design for NR-U", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1900098, vol. RAN WG1, 20 January 2019 (2019-01-20), pages 20190121 - 20190125

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021171094A1 (en) * 2020-02-26 2021-09-02 Orope France Sarl Communication method, telecommunication system, network node, base station and user equipment
WO2022205419A1 (en) * 2021-04-02 2022-10-06 富士通株式会社 Wireless communication method and apparatus, and system
CN113259876A (en) * 2021-06-22 2021-08-13 成都大学 Remote adjustment method for resolution of advertising board of Internet of things
CN113259876B (en) * 2021-06-22 2021-09-28 成都大学 Remote adjustment method for resolution of advertising board of Internet of things

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20220173867A1 (en) 2022-06-02
CN113615244A (en) 2021-11-05
US12063178B2 (en) 2024-08-13
SG11202110428QA (en) 2021-10-28
EP3949499A4 (en) 2022-11-30
EP3949499A1 (en) 2022-02-09

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US12063178B2 (en) User equipments, base stations, and methods
US11937229B2 (en) User equipments, base stations, and methods
US11863326B2 (en) Base stations and methods
US20220377791A1 (en) User equipments, base stations, and methods
US11849479B2 (en) Base stations and methods
US20220353894A1 (en) User equipments, base stations, and methods
WO2019099393A1 (en) User equipments, base stations and methods
WO2019099738A1 (en) User equipments, base stations and methods
US20230379966A1 (en) User equipments, base stations, and methods
US12048000B2 (en) User equipment, base station, method for a user equipment, and method for a base station
WO2021029442A1 (en) User equipments, base stations, and methods
US20230319842A1 (en) User equipments, base stations, and methods
WO2020166728A1 (en) Base stations, and methods
US20230180260A1 (en) User equipments, base stations, and methods

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20777059

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020777059

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20211027

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP